WO2020199212A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020199212A1
WO2020199212A1 PCT/CN2019/081568 CN2019081568W WO2020199212A1 WO 2020199212 A1 WO2020199212 A1 WO 2020199212A1 CN 2019081568 W CN2019081568 W CN 2019081568W WO 2020199212 A1 WO2020199212 A1 WO 2020199212A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
communication device
communication
status
indication
state
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/081568
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王静
吴毅凌
李晨琬
李振宇
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2019/081568 priority Critical patent/WO2020199212A1/en
Priority to PCT/CN2019/097370 priority patent/WO2020199429A1/en
Priority to CN201980093245.4A priority patent/CN113508556B/en
Publication of WO2020199212A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020199212A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/22Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received using redundant apparatus to increase reliability

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • the terminal device can be directly connected or connected to the network device through at least one relay device to form a wireless connection, so that the terminal device can successfully access the network based on the wireless connection, and finally realize business communication.
  • the communication equipment (terminal equipment and/or relay equipment) in the wireless connection is deployed in a fixed location for a long time.
  • the communication equipment In order to ensure the continuity of service transmission, the communication equipment often needs to work continuously for a long time.
  • the service life of the communication equipment is reduced, and in the case of a failure of the communication equipment, the wireless connection will be interrupted, which further improves the efficiency of service transmission.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device to improve the efficiency of service transmission.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a communication system with dual deployment of communication devices as shown in FIG. 1.
  • the first communication device is one of two communication devices that are dually deployed.
  • the method specifically includes the following steps:
  • the first communication device sends a first state change instruction to the network device, or obtains the first state change instruction from another device, and then the first communication device can change its own state and wireless interface configuration according to the first state change instruction .
  • the first state change indication is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the main communication device, or from the main communication device to the standby communication device.
  • the communication device whose status is the master communication device can also be changed to the backup communication device to stop performing transmission tasks at any time, and the communication device whose status is the backup communication device can take over the transmission task of the corresponding master communication device at any time and continue to perform service transmission.
  • the communication system can ensure the continuity of service transmission by changing the status of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, and can also prevent the communication device from running for a long time, thereby prolonging the service life of the communication device, and further improving the transmission efficiency. Improve the user experience.
  • the first communication device may obtain the first state change indication from the network device, the third communication device, or the second communication device.
  • the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device
  • the second communication device is the main communication device or backup device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device changes. communication device.
  • this design can make the state change trigger mode of the communication device in the communication system more flexible.
  • the first communication device may determine its current state in the following manner:
  • Manner 1 The first communication device sends status information to the network device or the third communication device, where the status information is used to notify that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
  • the first communication device can initiate state initialization by actively reporting its own state to the network device or the third communication device.
  • the first communication device receives a status indication sent by the network device or a third communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and The third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  • the network device or the third communication device can actively initialize the state of the first communication device by sending a status indication.
  • the first communication device receives the communication device status configuration information sent by the network device or the third communication device, and in the communication device status configuration information, the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
  • a communication device, the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
  • the network device or the third communication device can actively initialize the state of the first communication device by sending the communication device state configuration information.
  • the first communication device receives a second state change instruction sent by the network device or the third communication device, and the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is controlled by the main communication device Change to a backup communication device, or change from a backup communication device to a master communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  • the first communication device may send the status information to the network device in the following manner:
  • the first communication device sends the identification of the first communication device to the network device, wherein the identification of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate the first communication device.
  • the status of the communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
  • Manner 2 The first communication device sends instruction information of the second communication device to the network device, where the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device Is the second communication device.
  • Manner 3 The first communication device sends a status indication to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device.
  • the first communication device sends the identification and status indication of the first communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the first communication device The identifier is used to notify that the state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device.
  • the first communication device sends a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device, and the second communication device
  • the instruction information of the communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
  • the first communication device sends a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the second communication device The indication information of the communication device is used to indicate that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
  • the indication information of the second communication device is any one of the following: the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, The access of the second communication device returns the integrated node identification code.
  • the first communication device when the state of the first communication device changes to the master communication device, the first communication device obtains the communication configuration information, and then performs wireless interface configuration according to the communication configuration information.
  • the wireless interface includes a wireless interface between the first communication device and a third communication device or a network device, and a wireless interface between the first communication device and a fourth communication device; the fourth communication The device is a child node of the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the first communication device can replace the second communication device and establish a connection with the child node, parent node or network device of the second communication device, so that it can take over the transmission task of the second communication device and continue the business transmission.
  • the first communication device may obtain the communication configuration information in the following manner:
  • the first communication device obtains the communication configuration information from a second communication device, and the second communication device is the master communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed .
  • the first communication device receives the communication configuration information from the network device or a third communication device, and the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
  • the communication configuration information includes a first communication configuration information set and a second communication configuration information set; the first communication device receives the first communication configuration information set from the network device or a third communication device, And the first communication device obtains the second communication configuration information set from the second communication device, and the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
  • the first communication device can inherit the communication configuration of the second communication device, thereby avoiding wireless connection recovery failures caused by configuration misalignment, and also preventing the network device from re-disabling the first communication device.
  • the necessary communication configuration can shorten the time when the wireless connection is interrupted.
  • the first communication device after the first communication device obtains the communication configuration information from the second communication device, the first communication device sends the complete communication configuration information to the network device or the third communication device An instruction to notify the first communication device to save the complete communication configuration information, and no need to perform communication configuration on the first communication device.
  • the first communication device before the first communication device receives the communication configuration information from the network device or the third communication device, the first communication device sends the information to the network device or the third communication device. Send a communication configuration information request.
  • the first communication device can request the latest communication configuration information from other devices when it does not save the communication configuration information itself, or when the saved communication configuration information is incomplete, or when the saved communication configuration information is not the latest communication configuration information. The complete communication configuration information to successfully establish a wireless connection.
  • the first communication device determines to locally save the second When the communication configuration information is set, a communication configuration information request is sent to the network device or a third communication device; wherein the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, and the communication configuration information request includes The first instruction or the second instruction, the first instruction is used to indicate that the second communication configuration information set has been saved in the first communication device, and the second instruction is used to indicate that the first communication device has not Saving the first communication configuration information set.
  • the first communication device can request another part of the communication configuration information from the network device or the third communication device when saving part of the communication configuration information, avoiding obtaining complete information from the network device or the third communication device Communication configuration information causes unnecessary signaling overhead.
  • the communication configuration information includes any one or a combination of the following:
  • Wireless resource configuration information of the second communication device data buffered when the second communication device performs data transmission, the network identification of the fourth communication device, the context of the fourth communication device, and the quality of service QoS information of the fourth communication device ,
  • the data radio bearer ID DRB ID of the fourth communication device, and the radio resource configuration information of the fourth communication device wherein the second communication device is the first communication device before the state of the first communication device changes.
  • a master communication device corresponding to a communication device, where the fourth communication device is a child node of the first communication device or the second communication device.
  • the first state change indication includes any one or a combination of the following: the identification of the correspondence between the active and standby communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, the network identification of the first communication device, The status indication of the first communication device, the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the status indication of the second communication device, and the indication of the reason for the status change; wherein the second communication device is Before the state of the first communication device is changed, it is the main communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method, which is applied to a communication system with dual deployment of communication devices as shown in FIG. 1.
  • the first communication device is one of two communication devices that are dually deployed.
  • the method specifically includes the following steps:
  • the network device obtains the first state change instruction; then, the network device performs wireless interface configuration on the first communication device according to the changed state of the first communication device notified by the first state change instruction.
  • the first state change indication is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the main communication device, or from the main communication device to the standby communication device.
  • the communication device whose status is the master communication device can also be changed to the backup communication device to stop performing transmission tasks at any time, and the communication device whose status is the backup communication device can take over the transmission task of the corresponding master communication device at any time and continue to perform service transmission.
  • the communication system can ensure the continuity of service transmission by changing the status of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, and can also prevent the communication device from running for a long time, thereby prolonging the service life of the communication device, and further improving the transmission efficiency. Improve the user experience.
  • the network device may obtain the first state change indication from any of the following devices:
  • the first communication device the second communication device, the third communication device, the core network device, and the local device.
  • the network device, the third communication device, the first communication device or the second communication device in the communication system can all trigger the state change of the communication device. Therefore, this design can trigger the state change of the communication device in the communication system. The way is more flexible.
  • the network device may determine the current state of the first communication device in the following manner:
  • Manner 1 The network device receives first state information from the first communication device or the third communication device, and the first state information is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device Device, the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
  • the network device initializes the state of the first communication device through the state of the first communication device reported by the first communication device or the third communication device.
  • Manner 2 The network device receives second status information from a second communication device or a third communication device, and the second status information is used to notify: the status of the second communication device is the master communication device, and the network device According to the preset correspondence between the main and standby communication devices, it is determined that the standby communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  • the network device initializes the state of the first communication device through the state of the second communication device reported by the second communication device or the third communication device.
  • Manner 3 The network device receives second state information from a second communication device or a third communication device, and the second state information is used to notify: the state of the second communication device is a standby communication device, and the network device According to the preset correspondence between the main and standby communication devices, it is determined that the main communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  • the network device initializes the state of the first communication device through the state of the second communication device reported by the second communication device or the third communication device.
  • Manner 4 The network device sends a status indication to the first communication device or the third communication device according to the communication device status configuration information stored locally or received from the core network device, and the status indication is used to indicate the first communication device or the third communication device.
  • the state of the communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  • the network device can initialize the state of the first communication device according to the state configuration information of the communication device and by sending a state indication.
  • Manner 5 The network device sends communication device status configuration information to a third communication device, where the status of the first communication device in the communication device status configuration information is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the first communication device
  • the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  • the network device implements the initialization of the state of the first communication device according to and sending the state configuration information of the communication device.
  • the network device sends communication device state configuration information to the first communication device, and in the communication device state configuration information, the state of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
  • the network device can realize the initialization of the state of the first communication device according to and send the state configuration information of the communication device.
  • Manner 7 The network device sends a second state change instruction to the first communication device and/or the third communication device; the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is communicated by the master The device is changed to a standby communication device, or the standby communication device is changed to a master communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  • Manner 8 The network device receives a second state change instruction from a third communication device; the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, or The standby communication device is changed to the master communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  • the network device may receive the first state information from the first communication device in the following manner:
  • the network device receives the identification of the first communication device from the first communication device, wherein the identification of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate the first communication device.
  • the status of the communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
  • the network device receives the instruction information of the second communication device from the first communication device, and the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate the main communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device It is the second communication device.
  • Manner 3 The network device receives a status indication from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device.
  • Manner 4 The network device receives the identification and status indication of the first communication device from the first communication device, and the status indication is used to indicate that the status is a standby communication device or a main communication device, and the first communication device The identifier is used to notify that the state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device.
  • the network device receives a status indication and indication information of a second communication device from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device,
  • the indication information of the second communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
  • the network device receives a status indication and indication information of a second communication device from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the primary communication device, and the second The indication information of the communication device is used to indicate that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
  • the indication information of the second communication device is any one of the following: the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, The access of the second communication device returns the integrated node identification code.
  • the network device after the network device obtains the first status change indication, the network device sends communication device status configuration information to a third communication device, or sends the first status to a third communication device Change instructions,
  • the information received by the third communication device can update the state configuration information of the communication device saved by itself.
  • the network device can configure the wireless interface of the first communication device in the following manner:
  • Manner 1 The network device sends communication configuration information to the first communication device.
  • Manner 2 The network device sends a first configuration instruction to the third communication device, where the first configuration instruction is used to notify the third communication device to send communication configuration information to the first communication device.
  • Manner 3 The network device sends a second configuration instruction to the third communication device, where the second configuration instruction is used to notify the third communication device to send the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device.
  • Manner 4 The network device sends the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device.
  • the communication configuration information includes the first communication configuration information set and the second communication configuration information set.
  • the network device can make the first communication device inherit the communication configuration of the second communication device, thereby avoiding the failure of wireless connection recovery caused by configuration misalignment, and can also prevent the network device from reconnecting to the second communication device.
  • the unnecessary communication configuration of a communication device can shorten the time of wireless connection interruption.
  • the network device before the network device sends the communication configuration information to the first communication device, the network device receives a communication configuration information request from the first communication device.
  • the first communication device can obtain the communication configuration information through an active request.
  • the network device before the network device sends the first configuration instruction to the third communication device, the network device receives a communication configuration information request from the first communication device.
  • the first communication device can obtain the communication configuration information through an active request.
  • the network device before the network device sends the second configuration instruction to the third communication device, the network device receives a communication configuration request from the first communication device, where the communication configuration
  • the information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set
  • the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication
  • the first indication is used to indicate that the first communication device has saved the first communication device.
  • a set of communication configuration information where the second indication is used to indicate that the first set of communication configuration information is not saved in the first communication device.
  • the first communication device can request the network device to configure another part of the communication configuration information when saving part of the communication configuration information, avoiding unnecessary signaling overhead caused by the configuration of the complete communication configuration information by the network device.
  • the network device before the network device sends the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device, the network device receives a communication configuration request from the first communication device, wherein the The communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, and the first indication is used to indicate that the first communication device has saved all information.
  • the second communication configuration information set, and the second indication is used to indicate that the first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
  • the first communication device can request the network device to configure another part of the communication configuration information when saving part of the communication configuration information, avoiding unnecessary signaling overhead caused by the configuration of the complete communication configuration information by the network device.
  • the network device when the network device receives a complete indication of the communication configuration information from the first communication device, the network device does not configure the communication configuration information for the first communication device, and the communication configuration information is complete
  • the indication is used to notify: complete communication configuration information is stored in the first communication device.
  • the network device configures the communication configuration information for the first communication device again.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a communication system with dual deployment of communication devices as shown in FIG. 1.
  • the first communication device is one of two communication devices that are dually deployed.
  • the method specifically includes the following steps:
  • the first communication device sends request information to the network device to request to become the master communication device;
  • the network device sends a query instruction to the first communication device to notify the first communication device to actively report pairing status information.
  • both sides of the network device and the first communication device can synchronize the update of the state of the first communication device and the state of the second communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device.
  • the request information includes: the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the first communication device and/or the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the second communication device; where There is a pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the pairing status information includes one or more of the following: an identification of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device.
  • the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a unit for performing each step in the above first aspect or second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including at least one processing element and at least one storage element, wherein the at least one storage element is used to store programs and data, and the at least one processing element is used to execute The method provided in one aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a network device, including at least one processing element and at least one storage element, wherein the at least one storage element is used to store programs and data, and the at least one processing element is used to execute the first The method provided in the two aspects.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in any of the foregoing aspects.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer storage medium in which a computer program is stored.
  • the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method provided in any of the above aspects. .
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, which is used to read a computer program stored in a memory and execute the method provided in any one of the foregoing aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, which includes a processor, and is configured to support a computer device to implement the method provided in any one of the foregoing aspects.
  • the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary programs and data of the computer device.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, or can include chips and other discrete devices.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a communication device accessing a network according to an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of state initialization of the first communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of state initialization of a second communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a state initialization flowchart of a third communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of state initialization of a fourth communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of state initialization of a fifth communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a state initialization flowchart of a sixth communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of state initialization of a seventh communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of state initialization of an eighth communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of state initialization of the first communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the first state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a second type of state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a third type of state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a fourth type of state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a fifth type of state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the first wireless interface configuration provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the second configuration of a wireless interface provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 20 is the first flow chart for obtaining communication configuration information according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 21 is a second flow chart of obtaining communication configuration information according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 22 is a third flow chart of obtaining communication configuration information provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 23 is a fourth flow chart for obtaining communication configuration information according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 24 is a fifth flow chart of obtaining communication configuration information provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 25 is a sixth flow chart of obtaining communication configuration information according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 26 is a seventh flow chart of obtaining communication configuration information according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 27 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 28 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 29 is a structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • This application provides a communication method and device to improve the efficiency of service transmission.
  • the method and the device are based on the same inventive concept. Since the principles of the method and the device to solve the problem are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and the repetition will not be repeated.
  • the communication device in the standby communication device status can take over the transmission task of the corresponding main communication device at any time and continue to perform service transmission.
  • the communication system can ensure the continuity of service transmission by changing the status of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, and can also prevent the communication device from running for a long time, thereby prolonging the service life of the communication device, and further improving the transmission efficiency. Improve the user experience.
  • Network equipment is the equipment in the communication system that connects terminal equipment to the wireless network.
  • the network device may also be referred to as a base station, or may also be referred to as a radio access network (RAN) node (or device).
  • RAN radio access network
  • gNB transmission reception point
  • TRP transmission reception point
  • eNB evolved Node B
  • RNC radio network controller
  • Node B Node B
  • NB access point
  • access point access point
  • AP base station controller
  • BSC base transceiver station
  • BTS home base station
  • BBU baseband unit
  • eLTE-DSA Enterprise LTE Discrete Spectrum Aggregation
  • the network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node and a distributed unit (DU) node.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • This structure splits the protocol layer of the eNB in the long-term evolution (LTE) system. Some of the protocol layer functions are placed under the centralized control of the CU, and some or all of the protocol layer functions are distributed in the DU. Centralized control of DU.
  • Terminal equipment is a device that provides users with voice and/or data connectivity. Terminal equipment may also be called user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), and so on.
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • the terminal device may be a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, etc.
  • some examples of terminal equipment are: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablet computers, notebook computers, handheld computers, mobile internet devices (MID), smart point of sale (POS), wearable devices, Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, industrial control (industrial control) wireless terminals, unmanned driving (self-driving) wireless terminals, remote medical surgery)
  • IAB integrated access and backhaul
  • Relay equipment a device that has a bridging function and can establish a wireless connection with terminal equipment, network equipment, or other relay equipment.
  • the terminal device cannot directly connect to the network device, then at least one relay device can be deployed between the terminal device and the network device to form multi-hop communication. So as to realize the wireless connection between the terminal equipment and the network equipment.
  • relay equipment can be terminal equipment, network bridge, network equipment (such as micro base station, AP, etc.), access backhaul integrated IAB node (node), customer premises equipment (CPE), with access This application is not limited to equipment with integrated capabilities for incoming and return transmission.
  • network equipment such as micro base station, AP, etc.
  • access backhaul integrated IAB node node
  • CPE customer premises equipment
  • Communication equipment is a collective term for terminal equipment and relay equipment for ease of description. Therefore, in the embodiments of the present application, the first communication device, the second communication device, etc. specifically mentioned may be terminal devices or relay devices, which is not limited in this application.
  • the core network equipment is the equipment responsible for control and management functions such as mobility management or path management in the core network.
  • the core network equipment may be a mobility management entity (mobility management entity, MME), or a control plane function (control plane function, CPF) entity, etc.
  • the parent node of the communication device is the communication device accessed by the communication device in the wireless connection of multi-hop communication.
  • the child node of a communication device is a communication device that accesses the communication device in a wireless connection of multi-hop communication.
  • the main communication device is in a state where it is willing to turn on a specific function, or has turned on a specific function, or is designated to turn on a specific function, or is willing to activate a specific function, or has activated a specific function, or is designated to activate a specific function. equipment.
  • the main communication device refers to the willingness to turn on the relay function, or the relay function has been turned on, or the relay function is designated to be turned on, or the relay function is willing to be activated, or The relay function has been activated, or a device designated to activate the relay function.
  • the main communication device refers to the willingness to turn on the access backhaul integrated IAB, or the IAB is turned on, or the IAB is designated to be turned on, or the IAB is willing to be activated, or activated IAB, or a device designated to activate IAB.
  • the main communication device is an IAB node.
  • the standby communication equipment is unwilling to turn on specific functions, or willing to turn off specific functions, or has turned off specific functions, or is designated to turn off specific functions, or does not turn on specific functions, or does not activate specific functions, or does not intend to activate A specific function, or a communication device that is willing to deactivate a specific function, or has deactivated a specific function.
  • the standby communication device refers to unwillingly turn on the relay function, or willing to turn off the relay function, or has turned off the relay function, or is designated to turn off the relay function, or The relay function is not turned on, or the relay function is not activated, or the relay function is unwilling to activate, or the relay function is willing to be deactivated, or the relay function has been deactivated.
  • the standby communication device refers to unwillingly turn on the access backhaul integrated IAB, or willing to close IAB, or closed IAB, or designated to close IAB, or unwilling to activate IAB, or a device that is willing to deactivate IAB, or has deactivated IAB, or has not opened IAB, or has not activated IAB.
  • the standby communication device is a UE or eLTE-DSA UE.
  • FIG. 1 shows the architecture of a possible communication system to which the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • the communication system includes: an access network, a core network, and a data network (DN).
  • DN data network
  • the access network provides wireless access-related services for terminal equipment, so that the terminal equipment can be converged and connected to the core network and finally connected to the data network.
  • the wireless access network includes network equipment and relay equipment.
  • a terminal device Before a terminal device implements a service, it needs to access the network device and establish a wireless connection with the network device, so as to realize data transmission with the network device, so that the network device provides wireless access services for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may directly establish a wireless connection with the network device, such as The terminal device a shown in Figure 1.
  • the terminal device can pass through One or more relay devices establish a wireless connection with the network device to form multi-hop communication, such as terminal device b and terminal device c shown in FIG. 1.
  • the core network implements functions such as session management, access and mobility management, and policy control through core network equipment, as well as forwarding user plane data of terminal equipment.
  • the DN provides service services for the terminal device through data transmission with the terminal device, and the DN may be a PDN network, such as the Internet, IP Multi-media Service (IMS) network , Some application-specific data networks, etc.
  • PDN network such as the Internet, IP Multi-media Service (IMS) network , Some application-specific data networks, etc.
  • IMS IP Multi-media Service
  • the communication system in order to ensure the continuity and efficiency of service transmission of the terminal device.
  • the communication system can double-deploy some communication devices with relatively small or fixed locations, one of which is used as the main communication device and the other as the backup communication device.
  • terminal equipment a, terminal equipment c, and each relay device As shown in Figure 1, terminal equipment a, terminal equipment c, and each relay device.
  • the network equipment, various communication equipment, and core network equipment in the communication system can perform active and standby communication according to different service requirements or configuration requirements, or according to the operation of the main communication equipment at a node in the wireless connection The status change or configuration of the device.
  • the communication interaction between the main and standby communication devices may be through physical connections (such as network cables, serial cables, etc.) or wireless connections.
  • the standby communication device can monitor the operating state of the main communication device, so as to quickly switch between the main communication device and the standby communication device when the operating state of the main communication device is abnormal.
  • the standby communication device may monitor the operating state of the main communication device through a heartbeat mechanism.
  • the main communication device can also back up the communication configuration information used during service transmission to the backup communication device.
  • the backup communication device can be configured through the saved communication configuration information. , Can reduce the time delay caused by the transmission of communication configuration information through the network equipment or upper relay equipment, and quickly restore the wireless connection.
  • the communication system shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example, and does not constitute a limitation on the communication system to which the method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • Embodiments of the present application may also be applied to various types of communication systems and formats, for example: the fifth generation (The 5 th Generation, 5G) communication system, a long term evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) communication system, all the vehicles (vehicle to everything, V2X), long-term evolution-Internet of Vehicles (LTE-vehicle, LTE-V), Vehicle to Vehicle (V2V), Internet of Vehicles, Machine Type Communications (MTC), Internet of Things (Internet of Things) of things (IoT), long-term evolution-machine to machine (LTE-machine to machine, LTE-M), machine to machine (M2M), Internet of Things, enterprise LTE discrete spectrum aggregation (enterprise LTE discrete spectrum aggregation, eLTE-DSA) system, etc., which are not limited
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method.
  • this method mainly includes the following processes: the communication equipment access network process, the state initialization process of the communication equipment, and the state change process of the communication equipment.
  • the following takes two communication devices deployed in the same location—the first communication device and the second communication device—as an example for description.
  • the parent node of the first communication device and/or the second communication device is referred to as a third communication device.
  • the first communication device and the second communication device need to access the same cell.
  • the cell when the first communication device and the second communication device establish a connection with the network device through a third communication device, the cell is a cell managed by the third communication device; when the first communication device When a communication device and the second communication device directly establish a connection with the network device, the cell is a cell managed by the network device.
  • the first communication device and the second communication device may, but are not limited to, access the same cell through the following implementation manners.
  • the first communication device There is a communication connection between the first communication device and the second communication device, and communication interaction can be performed. After one of the first communication device and the second communication device successfully accesses the cell, the cell information of the cell is sent to the other communication device through the communication connection; the other communication device uses the cell information Access the cell.
  • the cell information of accessible cells is set in the first communication device and the second communication device, respectively, and the cell information set in the two communication devices is the same. In this way, the first communication device and the second communication device can access the same cell.
  • the cell information used for the access of the main and standby communication devices is added; the first communication device and the second communication device can access the same one according to the system message Community.
  • the cell information may include: cell identification, frequency point information used by the cell, and identification of a communication device that manages the cell, and so on.
  • the first communication device and the second communication device may access the network device or the third communication device by random access, and establish a radio resource control (RRC) connection with the network device .
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the embodiments of the present application provide the following examples to specifically describe the process of a communication device accessing a network.
  • Example 1 In the case that the first communication device and the second communication device use the above implementation mode 1 to access the same cell managed by the third communication device, refer to Figure 2 for the communication device access network flow. It includes the following steps:
  • the first communication device accesses the third communication device through a random access procedure.
  • the first communication device Before performing the random access procedure, the first communication device searches for a cell managed by the third communication device in a network search process. Then the first communication device receives the system message broadcast by the third communication device, and obtains the random access configuration information of the cell contained in the system message, so as to realize the random access configuration information through the random access configuration information of the cell. Into the process.
  • the first communication device sends a first RRC connection request (RRC connection request) to the third communication device to request the establishment of an RRC connection.
  • RRC connection request a first RRC connection request
  • the third communication device sends a second RRC connection request to the network device to request the first communication device to establish an RRC connection.
  • the third communication device accesses the network device through another communication device
  • the third communication device when S203 is performed, sends the second RRC to the network device by means of forwarding by the other communication device Connection request.
  • the network device After receiving the second RRC connection request, the network device sends a first RRC connection setup (RRC connection setup) to the third communication device.
  • RRC connection setup a first RRC connection setup
  • the network device when the third communication device accesses the network device through another communication device, when S204 is performed, the network device also needs to send the first communication device to the third communication device by means of forwarding by other communication devices.
  • An RRC connection setup when the third communication device accesses the network device through another communication device, when S204 is performed, the network device also needs to send the first communication device to the third communication device by means of forwarding by other communication devices.
  • RRC connection setup complete After receiving the second RRC connection setup, the first communication device sends an RRC connection setup complete (RRC connection setup complete) to the network device.
  • the first communication device successfully establishes an RRC connection with the network device, and can perform data transmission with the network device.
  • S202 may be performed during the process of performing S201 by the first communication device.
  • a scheduled transmission (scheduled transmission) message also called message 3 (message 3, msg3)
  • the first communication device sends the cell information of the cell accessed by the first communication device to the second communication device through a communication connection between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the second communication device selects to access the third communication device according to the received cell information.
  • the second communication device successfully establishes an RRC connection with the network device through S209-S214.
  • S201-S206 For the specific description process, please refer to the above description of S201-S206, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first communication device and the second communication device are relay devices
  • the first communication device or the second communication device whose status is the master communication device is successfully communicating with the After the network device establishes an RRC connection, it may broadcast a synchronization signal/system message, so that other communication devices or terminal devices can access the first communication device.
  • Example 2 When the first communication device and the second communication device directly access the network device, the specific process can also refer to FIG. 2. The difference is that the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through a random access process; in the process of establishing an RRC connection between the first communication device and the second communication device and the network device, There is no need to forward information through a third communication device.
  • two communication devices and network devices deployed in the same location need to determine the status of the two communication devices so that the network device can determine the status of the two communication devices according to the first communication device and the network device.
  • the status of the second communication device, and the wireless interface configuration of the two communication devices are important to ensure the effectiveness of the wireless link between the communication device and the network device.
  • the state of each communication device needs to be saved synchronously on the communication device side and the network device.
  • the third communication device may also synchronously save the states of the two communication devices.
  • the following describes the state initialization process of the communication device.
  • the communication system shown in FIG. 1 may, but is not limited to, adopt the following implementation manners to initialize the states of the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the state initialized by the first communication device is the main communication device
  • the state initialized by the second communication device is the standby communication device as an example for description.
  • Implementation manner 1 The first communication device and/or the second communication device report status information to the network device.
  • Example 1 When the first communication device and the second communication device establish a wireless connection with the network device by accessing the third communication device.
  • the state initialization process of the communication device specifically includes:
  • the first communication device After accessing the third communication device, the first communication device sends first status information to the third communication device, where the first status information is used to notify: the status of the first communication device Main communication equipment.
  • the first communication device may send the first status information to the third communication device in the following manner:
  • the first communication device sends the identification of the first communication device to the network device, where the identification of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate the first communication device.
  • the state of the communication device is the main communication device.
  • the identifiers of the first communication device and the second communication device may be preset and stored in a module, or may be configured at the application layer.
  • the identifier may be an international mobile equipment identity (IMEI), or an access backhaul integrated node identity (IAB node identity), or other fixed identifiers that can uniquely identify a communication device.
  • IMEI international mobile equipment identity
  • IAB node identity access backhaul integrated node identity
  • the identities of the first communication device and the second communication device may also be preset and stored in a subscriber identity module (SIM), or an embedded subscriber identity module (SIM) module, eSIM).
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • eSIM embedded subscriber identity module
  • the identifier may be an international mobile subscriber identification number (IMSI), or an integrated node identification code for access and backhaul, or other fixed identifiers that can uniquely identify the user of the communication device.
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identification number
  • IMSI integrated node identification code for access and backhaul
  • the identities of the two dual-deployed communication devices comply with the set rules.
  • the setting rule may be stipulated by a protocol or negotiated between various communication devices in the communication system.
  • the set field (such as high N bits) in the identifier of the first communication device and the identifier of the second communication device are the same, and the indication field (such as low M bits) is different.
  • M and N are positive integers and fixed values.
  • the indication fields contained in the identifiers of different communication devices of the primary communication device in the initial state are generally the same, and the indication fields contained in the identifiers of the different communication devices of the standby communication device in the initial state are also the same.
  • the identification of communication device 1 is AAA111
  • the identification of communication device 2 is AAA000
  • the identification of communication device 3 is BBB111
  • the identification of communication device 4 is BBB000. From the identification of each communication device, it can be seen that communication device 1 and communication device 3 are main communication devices, communication device 2 and communication device 4 are standby communication devices, and communication device 1 corresponds to communication device 2, and communication device 3 corresponds to communication device 4 .
  • the number representing the identification of the first communication device and the number representing the identification of the second communication device satisfy a specific mathematical relationship.
  • any device in the communication system can determine the identity of the corresponding main and standby communication device according to the identity of one of the communication devices and the setting rule.
  • Manner 2 The first communication device sends instruction information of the second communication device to the network device, where the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the first communication device 2. Communication equipment.
  • the network device can learn the status of the first communication device through the indication information of the second communication device, and the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
  • Manner 3 The first communication device sends a status indication to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device.
  • the status indication may be a master communication device status indication, that is, only a communication device whose initial state is the master communication device can send the status indication.
  • the state indication may indicate different states by taking different values. For example, when the status indication value is 1, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the master communication device, and when the status indication value is 0, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the standby communication device.
  • the network device may determine that the status indication is sent by the first communication device through various conventional technologies.
  • the status indication includes indication information of the first communication device.
  • the first communication device sends the identification and status indication of the first communication device to the network device, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the master communication device, and the identification of the first communication device is used to Notification:
  • the state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device.
  • the first communication device sends a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the second communication device The indication information of the communication device is used to indicate that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
  • the indication information of any communication device is any one of the following: the identification of the communication device, the network identification of the communication device, and the communication device The user identification of the communication device and the integrated node identification code of the communication device.
  • the network identifier of the communication device is a temporary identifier allocated by the network when the communication device accesses the network, for example, a cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI).
  • C-RNTI cell-radio network temporary identifier
  • the identification of the communication device is an access backhaul integrated node identification code, IMEI or other fixed identification that can uniquely identify the communication device.
  • the user identifier of the communication device is an access backhaul integrated node identification code, IMSI or other fixed identifier that can uniquely identify the communication device.
  • the third communication device sends the first state information to the network device.
  • the second communication device After accessing the third communication device, the second communication device sends second status information to the third communication device, where the second status information is used to notify: the status of the second communication device For the preparation of communication equipment.
  • the second communication device may also use five methods to send the second status information to the third communication device.
  • the second communication device sends the identification of the second communication device to the network device, where the identification of the second communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate the second communication device.
  • the status of the communication device is standby communication device.
  • Manner 2 The second communication device sends instruction information of the first communication device to the network device, where the instruction information of the first communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device One communication equipment.
  • Manner 3 The second communication device sends a status indication to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the second communication device is a standby communication device.
  • the status indication may be a standby communication device status indication, that is, only a communication device whose initial state is the standby communication device can send the status indication.
  • the state indication may indicate different states by taking different values.
  • the network device may determine that the status indication is sent by the second communication device through various conventional technologies.
  • the status indication includes indication information of the second communication device.
  • the second communication device sends the identification and status indication of the second communication device to the network device, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is a standby communication device, and the identification of the second communication device is used for Notification:
  • the state indicated by the state indication is the state of the second communication device.
  • the second communication device sends a status indication and indication information of the first communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the second communication device is a standby communication device, and the first communication device
  • the instruction information of the communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device.
  • S305 The third communication device sends the second status information to the network device.
  • the communication device state configuration information is maintained in the network device, and the communication device state configuration information includes the states of multiple communication devices, and the network device may retrieve the first communication device state configuration information from the communication device state configuration information. A communication device and/or the second communication device, thereby determining whether to save the state of the first communication device and/or the second communication device.
  • the third communication device may determine the status of the first communication device and/or the second communication device through S307a and S307b, or S308.
  • S307a After the third communication device receives the first state information, if it is determined that the state of the first communication device is not saved locally, determine the state of the first communication device according to the first state information Main communication equipment.
  • S307b After the third communication device receives the first state information, if it is determined that the state of the second communication device is not saved locally, determine the state of the second communication device according to the second state information For the preparation of communication equipment.
  • the network device sends the first status information/the second status information to the third communication device; or, the network device sends communication device status configuration information to the third communication device.
  • the communication device state configuration information the state of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the state of the second communication device is the standby communication device.
  • Example 2 When the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device, the specific flow of the state initialization process of the communication device can also be seen in FIG. 3. The difference is that the first communication device and the second communication device directly send the status information to the network device.
  • Example 3 When the first communication device and the second communication device establish a wireless connection with the network device by accessing the third communication device, referring to FIG. 4, the specific process of the state initialization process of the communication device includes:
  • S401 After the first communication device accesses the third communication device, it sends status information to the network device through the third communication device, where the status information is used to notify: The status is the main communication device.
  • the network device determines that the state of the first communication device is not saved locally, it determines that the state of the first communication device is the master communication device according to the state information, and corresponds to the preset master and backup communication device Relationship, determining that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
  • the corresponding relationship between the active and standby communication devices is: a set rule that conforms to the identity of the first communication device and the identity of the second communication device.
  • the setting rule may be stipulated by an agreement or negotiated between various communication devices in the communication system.
  • the status information includes the identity of the first communication device, so that the network device can determine the identity of the second communication device according to the identity of the first communication device, thereby determining the identity of the first communication device
  • the standby communication device is the second communication device.
  • the first 3 digits of the identification of the primary communication device and the identification of the standby communication device are the same, the last 1 digit is different, and the status of the communication device whose 1 digit value is 0 after the identification is the standby communication device.
  • the status of a communication device with a value of 1 is the master communication device.
  • the network device may determine that the identifier of the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is XXX0.
  • the corresponding relationship between the active and standby communication devices is stored by the network device or received from a core network device.
  • the corresponding relationship between the main and standby communication devices includes the indication information of the first communication device and the indication information of the second communication device, for example, as shown in Table 1 or Table 2.
  • the indication information of any communication device may be the identification of the communication device, the network identification of the communication device, the user identification of the communication device, and so on.
  • the network device sends a status indication to the second communication device through the third communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the second communication device is a standby communication device.
  • Example 4 which is the same as Example 3, is also executed when the first communication device and the second communication device establish a wireless connection with the network device by accessing the third communication device.
  • the process is similar to Example 3, except that the second communication device reports its own state.
  • the specific process includes:
  • S501 After the second communication device accesses the third communication device, it sends status information to the network device through the third communication device, where the status information is used to notify: The status is standby communication equipment.
  • the network device determines that the state of the second communication device is not saved locally, it determines that the state of the second communication device is a standby communication device according to the state information, and corresponds to a preset master and standby communication device Relationship, determining that the primary communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device.
  • the network device sends a status indication to the first communication device through the third communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device.
  • Examples 5 and 6 are both executed when the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device, and refer to FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 respectively. 4 and 5, the message interaction between the first communication device, the second communication device, and the network device does not need to be forwarded through the third communication device, so the specific process can be referred to the above description of FIGS. 5 and 6 The description of the illustrated example will not be repeated here.
  • Implementation manner 2 The first communication device sends request information to the network device for requesting to become the master communication device.
  • Example 1 In the case where the first communication device is directly connected to the network device, refer to FIG. 8. In this example, description is made by taking the first communication device as a communication device with IAB capability as an example.
  • the process of the first communication device requesting to become the master communication device specifically includes:
  • the first communication device sends request information to the network device, where the request information is used to request to turn on or activate the IAB.
  • the request information includes the IAB node identification code of the first communication device.
  • the request information includes the IAB node identification code and/or C-RNTI of the second communication device.
  • the second communication device and the first communication device have a pairing relationship or an association relationship or a pairing relationship or a corresponding relationship between a master and a backup communication device or belong to the same device group.
  • the request information is an access backhaul integrated connection request (IAB connection request) message or an access backhaul integrated activation request (IAB activation request) message or an access backhaul integrated activation request (IAB enable) message. request) or access backhaul integrated permission request (IAB permission request).
  • IAB connection request an access backhaul integrated connection request
  • IAB activation request an access backhaul integrated activation request
  • IAB enable an access backhaul integrated activation request
  • IAB permission request access backhaul integrated permission request
  • the network device may send a query instruction to the first communication device, where the query instruction is used to instruct the first communication device to send pairing status information to the network device .
  • the first communication device After receiving the query instruction, the first communication device sends pairing status information to the network device.
  • the pairing status information includes one or more of the following: an identifier of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, an IAB node of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device An identification code, a C-RNTI of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and a status indication of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device.
  • the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
  • S802a If the first communication device receives the configuration information sent by the network device, the first communication device turns on or activates the IAB.
  • the configuration information is used to configure the first communication device to enable or activate IAB, or to configure/reconfigure the IAB parameters of the first communication device.
  • the configuration information may be an access backhaul integrated configuration (IAB configuration) message or an access backhaul integrated connection configuration (IAB connection configuration) message or an access backhaul integrated setup (IAB setup) message or an access backhaul. Transmission of integrated connection setup (IAB connection setup) message.
  • the state of the first communication device is the master communication device.
  • the network device may also send a status indication to the second communication device for notifying the second communication device to be a standby communication device, So that the second communication device no longer initiates the process of becoming the master communication device.
  • S802b If the first communication device receives the rejection information sent by the network device, the first communication device does not turn on or does not activate the IAB.
  • the rejection information is used to reject the request of the first communication device to turn on or activate the IAB.
  • the first communication device may send a request information again to request to become the primary communication device; or the first communication device may determine its own status as a backup communication device after receiving the rejection information,
  • the network device sends the rejection information to the first communication device, it also sends configuration information to the second communication device to instruct the second communication device to become the master communication device; or the first communication device
  • the second communication device is notified through the communication connection with the second communication device that the request of the first communication device to become the master communication device has failed, so that the second communication device requests to become the master communication device through the above process.
  • Example 2 When the first communication device establishes a wireless connection with the network device by accessing the third communication device, the flow of the first communication device requesting to become the master communication device can also be referred to as shown in FIG. 8. The difference is that the information interaction between the first communication device and the network device is forwarded by the third communication device.
  • Implementation manner 3 The network device sets the status of the first communication device and the second communication device, and notifies the respective status of the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the communication device state configuration information is maintained in the network device, and the communication device state configuration information stores the state of the first communication device and/or the state of the second communication device.
  • Example 1 After the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device, the network device passes through the third communication device according to the stored state configuration information of the communication device.
  • the communication device sends a first status indication and a second status indication to the first communication device and the second communication device, respectively.
  • the specific process can be referred to as shown in Figure 9.
  • the first status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a master communication device
  • the second status indication is used to indicate that the status of the second communication device is a standby communication device.
  • Example 2 After the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device, the network device respectively communicates with the first communication device through the third communication device
  • the device and the second communication device send communication device state configuration information.
  • the specific process can also be referred to as shown in FIG. 9. When different, replace the first status indication and the second status indication in the figure with the communication device status configuration information.
  • Example 3 After the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device, the network device sends a first status indication or communication to the third communication device Device status configuration information, where the first status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device and/or the status of the second communication device is the standby communication device. After receiving the first status indication or the communication device status configuration information, the third communication device sends a second status indication to the first communication device, and sends a third status indication to the second communication device.
  • the second state indication is used to indicate that the state of the first communication device is a master communication device
  • the third state indication is used to indicate that the state of the second communication device is a standby communication device.
  • Example 4 and Example 5 Both are executed when the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device, and the specific process can also be referred to FIG. 9. The difference is that the message interaction between the first communication device, the second communication device, and the network device does not need to be forwarded through the third communication device.
  • the network device when the first communication device and the second communication device establish a wireless connection with the network device by accessing the third communication device, the network device will include or indicate When information about the states of a communication device and a second communication device is sent to the third communication device, the third communication device saves the states of the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • Implementation manner 4 The core network device sets the status of the first communication device and the second communication device, and notifies the network device of the status of the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the communication device state configuration information is maintained in the core network device, and the communication device state configuration information stores the state of the first communication device and/or the state of the second communication device.
  • the core network device sends the communication device state configuration information to the network device; then, the network device then informs the first The respective status of the communication device and the second communication device.
  • the flow of each example in the fourth implementation manner may refer to the flow of each example in the third implementation manner, which will not be repeated here.
  • the core network device may carry the communication device state configuration information in an initial context setup request (initial context setup Request).
  • the information when any communication device (the first communication device or the second communication device) exchanges information with other devices, the information includes its identification.
  • the information when the information contains or indicates the status of a certain communication device, it also contains the identification of the communication device.
  • the state initialization process of the communication device may be performed after the communication device accesses the network process.
  • the information exchange in the state initialization process of the communication device may be implemented in the RRC connection re-establishment process, the RRC connection recovery process, or the RRC connection reconfiguration process.
  • the first communication device or the second communication device sends status information to the third communication device or network device, or when the third communication device sends status information or communication device status configuration information to the network device
  • the corresponding information can be carried in the RRC connection reestablishment request, the RRC connection recovery request, or the RRC connection reconfiguration request.
  • the information can also be carried in the RRC connection re-establishment, RRC connection recovery process, or the information exchanged between the two devices during the RRC connection reconfiguration process, specifically I won't repeat them here.
  • the state initialization process of the communication device may also be performed during the process of the communication device accessing the network.
  • the information exchange in the state initialization procedure of the communication device may be implemented during the establishment of the RRC connection. For example, when the first communication device or the second communication device sends status information to the third communication device or network device, or when the third communication device sends status information or communication device status configuration information to the network device, the corresponding information may be carried In the RRC connection establishment request.
  • the communication device status configuration information maintained in each device of the communication system may be as shown in Table 3 or Table 4:
  • the state change process of a communication device specifically includes the following two sub-processes: the state change trigger sub-process and the wireless interface configuration sub-process.
  • the implementation of the state change trigger is as follows:
  • Implementation manner 1 Triggered by the first communication device whose status is the master communication device;
  • Implementation manner 2 triggered by the second communication device in the standby communication device state
  • Implementation manner 3 triggered by the third communication device, the parent node of the first communication device and/or the second communication device;
  • Implementation mode 5 Triggered by core network equipment.
  • the communication system can be triggered by any of the above implementations, or triggered by a combination of any of the implementations, which is not limited in this application.
  • the communication system when the communication system is triggered by the realization method 1, the communication system also needs to send a state change instruction to the second communication device that is about to change to the primary communication device; when the communication system is triggered by the realization method 2, the communication system The state change instruction may be sent to the second communication device that is about to change to the main communication device, or not.
  • the communication system uses both implementation manner 1 and implementation manner 2 to be triggered at the same time, the communication system does not need to send state change instructions to the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the first communication device whose status is the master communication device may detect that its operating status is poor (for example, the hardware temperature reaches a preset value, or the system software version is low and needs to be upgraded, etc.), or the status is the master communication device. When the duration of the device reaches the set duration, the status change is triggered.
  • Example 1 In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device.
  • the state change triggering sub-process specifically includes:
  • the first communication device sends a first state change instruction to the network device through the third communication device, where the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is controlled by the main communication device Change to standby communication equipment.
  • the first state change indication includes any one or a combination of the following: the identification of the correspondence between the active and standby communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, the network identification of the first communication device, the first communication device A status indication of a communication device, an identification of the second communication device, a network identification of the second communication device, a status indication of the second communication device, and an indication of the reason for the status change.
  • the network device After receiving the first state change instruction, the network device determines that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device (before the state change) is the second communication device, and has a status of the communication device maintained locally The states of the first communication device and the second communication device in the configuration information are changed, and then a second state change instruction is sent to the second communication device through the third communication device, the second state change instruction It is used to notify that the status of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
  • the network device may determine the backup device corresponding to the first communication device through the corresponding relationship between the master and backup communication devices.
  • the communication device is the second communication device, and the network device may also determine that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device based on the content in the first state change instruction.
  • the network device may first determine the target master-backup communication of the first communication device through the identification of the correspondence between the master and backup communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, the network identification of the first communication device, etc. Device correspondence, and then another communication device (the second communication device) included in the target master-backup communication device correspondence is the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device.
  • the third communication device may receive the first state change instruction through the above In the manner of a network device, the states of the first communication device and the second communication device in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information are changed.
  • the network device may also instruct the third communication through S1103a or S1103b The device changes the states of the first communication device and the second communication device in the maintained communication device state configuration information.
  • the network device sends a third state change instruction to the third communication device, where the third state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the backup communication device, and /Or, the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
  • the network device sends the state configuration information of the communication device after the state update to the third communication device.
  • the state of the first communication device is the standby communication device
  • the state of the second communication device is the master communication device.
  • Example 2 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device.
  • the specific process of the state change triggering sub-process can also be seen in Figure 11. The difference is that the message interaction between the first communication device, the second communication device, and the network device does not need to be forwarded through the third communication device.
  • Example 3 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device.
  • the state change triggering sub-process specifically includes:
  • the network device After receiving the first state change instruction, the network device determines that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device (before the state change) is the second communication device, and has a status of the communication device maintained locally The state of the first communication device and the second communication device in the configuration information is changed; and then the updated state configuration information of the communication device is sent to the third communication device.
  • the third communication device After receiving the updated communication device status configuration information, the third communication device determines that the standby communication device (before the status change) corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device, and then sends The second communication device sends the second state change instruction.
  • the second state change indication is used to notify that the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
  • the second communication device in the state of the standby communication device may trigger the state change when it detects that the first communication device operates abnormally, or when the duration of the state of the standby communication device reaches a set duration.
  • the second communication device sends a first state change instruction to the network device, and the first state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
  • the second state change instruction sent by the network device or the third communication device to the first communication device is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device.
  • the second communication device in the status of the standby communication device may be a communication device that is not turned on or that does not activate IAB.
  • the second communication device may use the process shown in FIG. 8 to request to become the master communication device, that is, the second communication device sends request information to the network device. Wherein, the request information is used to request to open or activate the IAB.
  • the request information includes the IAB node identification code of the second communication device.
  • the request information includes the IAB node identification code and/or C-RNTI of the first communication device.
  • the request information is an access backhaul integrated connection request message or an access backhaul integrated activation request message or an access backhaul integrated start request or an access backhaul integrated permission request.
  • the second communication device determines that its state is changed to the master communication device.
  • the third communication device may detect a communication abnormality (for example, the number of retransmissions of service data is greater than a set number), or determine that the state of the first communication device is the main communication device and the duration reaches the set time period. To trigger a status change.
  • a communication abnormality for example, the number of retransmissions of service data is greater than a set number
  • Example 1 In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device.
  • the state change triggering sub-process specifically includes:
  • the third communication device After determining that the above-mentioned state change condition is currently met, the third communication device sends a first state change instruction to the network device, where the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is controlled by the host The communication device is changed to a standby communication device, and/or, the status of the second communication device is changed to the standby communication device as the master communication device; or the third communication device responds to the first communication device status configuration information maintained locally The state of a communication device and the second communication device is changed, and then the updated state configuration information of the communication device is sent to the network device.
  • the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is controlled by the host The communication device is changed to a standby communication device, and/or, the status of the second communication device is changed to the standby communication device as the master communication device; or the third communication device responds to the first communication device status configuration information maintained locally The state of a communication device and the second communication device is changed, and then the updated state configuration information of the communication
  • the network device After the network device receives the first state change instruction or the updated communication device state configuration information of the third communication device, it also checks the first communication device and all communication devices in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information. The state of the second communication device is changed.
  • the network device sends a second state change instruction to the first communication device through the third communication device.
  • the second state change indication is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from a main communication device to a backup communication device.
  • the network device sends a third state change instruction to the second communication device through the third communication device.
  • the third state change indication is used to notify that the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
  • the network device may trigger the state change after determining that the state of the first communication device is the main communication device for a duration of a set duration or after receiving a notification of the state change input by a technician.
  • Example 1 In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device.
  • the state change triggering sub-process specifically includes:
  • the network device After the network device determines that the above-mentioned state change condition is currently met, it changes the state of the first communication device and the second communication device in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information, and communicates to the first communication device.
  • the device sends a first state change instruction, where the first state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from a main communication device to a backup communication device.
  • the network device sends a second state change instruction to the second communication device, where the second state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
  • the third communication device when the third communication device also maintains communication device state configuration information, after the third communication device receives the first state change instruction and the second state change instruction, The states of the first communication device and the second communication device in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information may be changed.
  • the third communication device does not perform the above process, but does not process the first state change instruction and the second state change instruction, and directly forwards them to the first communication device and the second communication device, the The network device may also notify the third communication device to change the state of the first communication device and the second communication device in the maintained communication device state configuration information through S1603.
  • the network device sends the changed communication device state configuration information maintained by the network device to the third communication device.
  • Example 2 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device.
  • the specific process of the state change triggering sub-process can also be seen in Figure 16. The difference is that the message interaction between the first communication device, the second communication device, and the network device does not need to be forwarded through the third communication device.
  • Example 3 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device.
  • the state change triggering sub-process specifically includes:
  • the network device changes the state of the first communication device and the second communication device in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information after determining that the above-mentioned state change condition is currently satisfied. Then, the network device sends a first state change instruction to the third communication device, where the first state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, and /Or, the status of the second communication device is that the standby communication device changes to the master communication device; or the network device sends the updated communication device status configuration information to the third communication device.
  • the third communication device sends a second state change instruction to the first communication device according to the received first state change instruction or the communication device state configuration information updated by the network device.
  • the second state change indication is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from a main communication device to a backup communication device.
  • the third communication device sends a third state change instruction to the second communication device according to the received first state change instruction or the communication device state configuration information updated by the network device.
  • the third state change indication is used to notify that the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
  • Example 5 After the network device determines that the above state change condition is currently met, the network device sends configuration information to the second communication device, where the configuration information is used to configure the second communication device to enable or activate IAB.
  • the configuration information may be an access backhaul integrated configuration message or an access backhaul integrated connection configuration message or an access backhaul integrated establishment message or an access backhaul integrated connection establishment message.
  • the configuration information includes an IAB activation instruction or an IAB activation instruction.
  • Example 6 After the network device determines that the above state change condition is currently met, the network device sends configuration information to the first communication device, and the configuration information is used to configure the first communication device to be turned off or not turned on or IAB is activated or not activated.
  • the configuration information may be an access backhaul integrated release message or an access backhaul integrated connection release message.
  • the configuration information includes an IAB deactivation instruction or an IAB shutdown instruction.
  • the network device when the state configuration information of the communication device is maintained in the core network device, the network device needs to notify the core network device after determining that the state of the first communication device has changed.
  • the network device sends a status change instruction.
  • the status change indication may be carried in a UE context modification indication (UE context modification indication).
  • the core network device may trigger the state change when it is determined that the duration of the first communication device state as the main communication device reaches a set duration, or after receiving a notification of state change input by a technician.
  • the core network device After the core network device determines that the above-mentioned state change condition is currently met, the state of the first communication device and the second communication device in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information is changed. Then, the core network device sends a first state change instruction to the network device, where the first state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from a primary communication device to a backup communication device, and/ Or, the status of the second communication device is that the standby communication device changes to the master communication device; or the core network device sends the updated communication device status configuration information to the network device.
  • the first state change indication may be carried in a UE context modification request (UE context modification Request).
  • UE context modification Request UE context modification Request
  • the network device may notify the respective states of the first communication device and the second communication device according to the received first state change instruction or the communication device state configuration information updated by the core network device. Specifically, the network device may notify the respective states of the first communication device and the second communication device through the methods in each example in the fourth implementation manner. Therefore, for the process of each example in the implementation manner five, refer to the implementation manner The process of each example in the fourth is not repeated here.
  • the status change indications involved in each example in each of the above implementations include any one or a combination of the following: the identification of the correspondence between the active and standby communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, and the first communication device.
  • the communication system may start to execute the wireless interface configuration sub-process, and perform the wireless interface configuration sub-process for the first communication device and The second communication device performs wireless interface configuration so that the network device can release the wireless connection with the first communication device and establish a wireless connection with the second communication device.
  • the network device may release the RRC connection with the first communication device through a traditional RRC release process. Then, the first communication device can terminate the communication service of the relay cell it manages.
  • the network device may establish an RRC connection with the second communication device through an RRC reconfiguration process.
  • Example 1 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device.
  • the process of establishing an RRC connection between the network device and the second communication device specifically includes:
  • the network device updates the routing table after updating the state configuration information of the communication device maintained by itself, and sends a G1 port RRC connection reconfiguration (RRC connection reconfiguration) to the third communication device.
  • RRC connection reconfiguration RRC connection reconfiguration
  • the third communication device updates the routing table after receiving the G1 port RRC connection reconfiguration sent by the third communication device, and sends the Ur port RRC connection reconfiguration to the second communication device.
  • the Ur port RRC connection reconfiguration includes routing information.
  • the second communication device performs radio interface configuration according to the received Ur port RRC connection reconfiguration, and after the configuration is completed, sends the Ur port RRC connection reconfiguration complete (RRC connection reconfiguration complete) to the third communication device.
  • the wireless interface configuration performed by the second communication device includes: establishing the RLC entity corresponding to the DRB, the PDCP entity, and configuring the MAC/PHY/adaptation layer.
  • the second communication device performs wireless interface configuration according to the received G1-port RRC connection reconfiguration sent by the network device, and after the configuration is completed, sends the G1-port RRC connection reconfiguration completion to the network device.
  • the wireless interface configuration performed by the second communication device includes: creating a relay cell (that is, a cell managed by the second communication device), establishing a sub-link side RLC entity, and initializing MAC/PHY/suitability Configuration layer, initializing Ur port RRC layer, etc.
  • the second communication device needs to obtain communication configuration information through S1800, and perform wireless interface configuration according to the communication configuration information.
  • S1800 The second communication device obtains communication configuration information.
  • the communication configuration information includes any one or combination of the following:
  • Wireless resource configuration information of the first communication device data buffered when the first communication device performs data transmission, the network identification of the fourth communication device, the context of the fourth communication device, and the quality of service QoS information of the fourth communication device ,
  • the data radio bearer ID DRB ID of the fourth communication device, and the radio resource configuration information of the fourth communication device is a child node of the first communication device or the second communication device.
  • the data buffered during data transmission by the first communication device may include, but is not limited to, the following content: data buffered during data transmission between the first communication device and the network device or the third communication device; Data buffered when the first communication device and the fourth communication device perform data transmission.
  • the radio resource configuration information of the first communication device includes: RLC configuration information, PDCP configuration information, MAC configuration information, PHY configuration information, etc. corresponding to the DRB, and relay cell configuration information (for example, cell identification, cell Network identification resource pool, etc.), and RLC configuration information, MAC configuration information, PHY configuration information, etc. corresponding to the RLC on the sub-link side.
  • the second communication device executes S1803, it can establish the RLC entity corresponding to the DRB according to the RLC configuration information, PDCP configuration information, MAC configuration information, PHY configuration information, etc. corresponding to the DRB in the radio resource configuration information.
  • MAC/PHY/adaptation layer etc.
  • the second communication device When the second communication device performs S1806, it can create a relay cell according to the relay cell configuration information; and establish a sub-chain according to the RLC configuration information, MAC configuration information, PHY configuration information, etc. corresponding to the sub-link side RLC
  • the roadside RLC entity initializes the MAC/PHY/adaptation layer, initializes the RRC layer of the Ur port, etc.
  • the second communication device when the second communication device is a relay device, when the second communication device creates a relay cell, it needs to be implemented according to the following information:
  • the network identifier of the fourth communication device, the context of the fourth communication device, the quality of service QoS information of the fourth communication device, the data radio bearer ID DRB ID of the fourth communication device, and the fourth communication device The wireless resource configuration information of the device.
  • Example 2 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device. Referring to FIG. 19, the process of establishing an RRC connection between the network device and the second communication device specifically includes:
  • the network device updates the routing table after updating the state configuration information of the communication device maintained by itself, and sends the RRC connection reconfiguration to the second communication device.
  • the second communication device performs wireless interface configuration according to the received RRC connection reconfiguration, and after the configuration is completed, sends the RRC connection reconfiguration complete to the network device.
  • the wireless interface configuration performed by the second communication device is the same as the description in S1803 in Example 1, which is repeated here.
  • the second communication device performs wireless interface configuration according to the received G1-port RRC connection reconfiguration sent by the network device, and after the configuration is completed, sends the G1-port RRC connection reconfiguration completion to the network device.
  • the wireless interface configuration performed by the second communication device is the same as the description in S1806 in Example 1, and will not be repeated here.
  • the second communication device needs to obtain communication configuration information through S1900, and perform wireless interface configuration according to the communication configuration information.
  • the second communication device obtains communication configuration information.
  • the related description of the communication configuration information and the related description of the wireless interface configuration performed by the second communication device according to the communication configuration information can be referred to the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second communication device may, but is not limited to, obtain communication configuration information through the following implementation manners (execute the foregoing S1800 or S1900):
  • Implementation manner 1 The second communication device obtains the communication configuration information from the first communication device.
  • Implementation manner 2 The second communication device obtains the communication configuration information from the network device.
  • Implementation manner 3 The second communication device obtains the communication configuration information from the third communication device.
  • the second communication device obtains a first communication configuration information set from the network device, and obtains a second communication configuration information set from the first communication device.
  • Implementation manner 5 The second communication device obtains the first communication configuration information set from the third communication device, and obtains the second communication configuration information set from the first communication device.
  • the communication configuration information includes the first communication configuration information set and the second communication configuration information set.
  • Example 1 In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to FIG. 20, the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
  • the first communication device whose status is the master communication device may periodically report to the first communication device during operation. 2.
  • the communication device sends the latest communication configuration information.
  • the second communication device After the second communication device receives the latest communication configuration information, it overwrites the previously received communication configuration information.
  • S2002 After the second communication device determines that its state is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device, the integrity and real-timeness of the saved communication configuration information (consistent with the communication configuration information currently saved by the first communication device) Perform verification; when the second communication device determines that the saved communication configuration information is complete and real-time, it sends a complete communication configuration information indication to the network device through the third communication device. among them.
  • the complete communication configuration information indication is used to notify that complete communication configuration information is stored in the first communication device.
  • the network device does not need to configure the communication configuration information in the subsequent process of configuring the wireless interface of the second communication device.
  • Example 2 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device directly access the network device. The process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information can also be seen in FIG. 20. The difference is that the communication configuration information sent by the second communication device to the network device indicates that the third communication device does not need to forward the communication configuration information. .
  • Example 3 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device, and communication configuration information is stored in the third communication device.
  • the process of acquiring the communication configuration information by the second communication device may also refer to FIG. 20.
  • the communication configuration information sent by the second communication device to the third network device is a complete indication.
  • the complete communication configuration information indication is used to notify that complete communication configuration information is stored in the first communication device. In this way, when the network device configures the wireless interface of the second communication device, there is no need for the third communication device to send communication configuration information to the second communication device.
  • Example 1 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to FIG. 21, the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
  • the second communication device sends a communication configuration information request to the network device through the third communication device after determining that its state is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
  • the second communication device may save the When the integrity and real-timeness of the communication configuration information (consistent with the communication configuration information currently saved by the first communication device) are checked and it is determined that the check fails, S2101 is executed.
  • the network device After receiving the communication configuration information request, the network device sends the communication configuration information to the second communication device through the third communication device.
  • Example 2 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device directly access the network device.
  • the process of obtaining the communication configuration information by the second communication device may also refer to FIG. 21.
  • the difference is that the third communication device does not need to forward the information when the second communication device exchanges information with the network device.
  • Example 1 In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to FIG. 22, the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
  • S2201 Same as S2101 in Example 1 in the third implementation mode, and will not be repeated here.
  • the network device sends a configuration instruction to the third communication device.
  • the configuration instruction is used to notify the third communication device to send the communication configuration information to the first communication device.
  • the third communication device After receiving the configuration instruction, the third communication device sends the communication configuration information to the second communication device according to the configuration instruction.
  • the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
  • the second communication device may execute S2301 after determining that its state is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device; or it may perform S2301 after checking the integrity and real-timeness of the saved communication configuration information (with the first communication device).
  • the communication configuration information currently saved by the device is consistent
  • perform verification and determine that the verification fails then execute S2301.
  • Example 1 In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device.
  • the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
  • the second communication configuration information set may be periodically backed up by the second communication device to the second communication device.
  • the second set of communication configuration information may also remain unchanged for a set duration.
  • the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, and the first indication is used to indicate the first communication device
  • the second communication configuration information set has been saved in the, and the second indication is used to indicate that the first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
  • the network device After receiving the communication configuration information request, the network device sends a message to the second communication device through the third communication device according to the first instruction or the second instruction in the communication configuration information request. Send the first set of communication configuration information.
  • Example 2 In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device directly access the network device.
  • the process of obtaining the communication configuration information by the second communication device may also refer to FIG. 24.
  • the difference is that the third communication device does not need to forward the information when the second communication device exchanges information with the network device.
  • Example 1 In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device.
  • the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
  • S2501 and S2502 are the same as S2401 and S2402 of Example 1 in Implementation Mode 4. For specific description, refer to the above description of S2401 and S2402, which will not be repeated here.
  • the network device sends a configuration instruction to the third communication device.
  • the configuration instruction is used to notify the third communication device to send the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device.
  • the third communication device After receiving the configuration instruction, the third communication device sends the first communication configuration information set to the second communication device according to the configuration instruction.
  • Example 2 When the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device, and the third communication device saves the latest communication configuration information.
  • the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
  • S2601 is the same as S2401 in Example 1 in the fourth implementation manner. For specific description, refer to the above description of S2401, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second communication device sends a communication configuration information request to the third communication device when it determines that the second communication configuration information set is stored locally after determining that its state is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
  • the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set
  • the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication
  • the first indication is used to indicate the first communication device
  • the second communication configuration information set has been saved in the, and the second indication is used to indicate that the first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
  • the third communication device After receiving the communication configuration information request, the third communication device sends first communication configuration information to the second communication device according to the first instruction or the second instruction in the communication configuration information set.
  • the above-mentioned state change triggering sub-process and the wireless interface configuration sub-process can be implemented during the RRC reconfiguration process performed by the communication system.
  • the network device may carry a state change indication or communication configuration information or configuration indication in the RRC connection reconfiguration.
  • the second communication device may carry a communication configuration information request or a complete indication of the communication configuration information in the completion of the RRC connection reconfiguration.
  • the change from the main communication device to the standby communication device may mean that the state of the communication device is turned on from IAB or activated and changed to IAB.
  • Turned off or not turned on or deactivated or not activated; changing from the standby communication device to the master communication device can mean that the state of the communication device is turned off or not turned on or deactivated or not activated to IAB turned on or activated; the status is master communication
  • the device may refer to the state of the communication device being IAB on or active; the state of the standby communication device may refer to the state of the communication device being IAB off or inactive or deactivated or inactive; in addition, configuring the wireless interface may include configuring IAB.
  • the identifier of the first communication device may be the IAB node identification code, IMSI, IMEI of the first communication device, or an identifier that uniquely identifies the IAB node, or other identifiers that can uniquely identify the first communication device.
  • the identifier of the second communication device may be the IAB node identification code, IMSI, IMEI of the second communication device, or an identifier that uniquely identifies the IAB node, or other identifiers that can uniquely identify the second communication device.
  • Ur interface refers to the wireless interface between a communication device and its parent node, such as the wireless interface between a UE and an IAB node.
  • the G1 port refers to the wireless interface between the relay device and the network device, such as the wireless interface between the IAB node and the base station.
  • the pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device may refer to a connection relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device, for example, there is a wireless connection or a wired connection between the first communication device and the second communication device relationship.
  • the sub-link of the communication device refers to the link between the communication device and the child node of the communication device.
  • the parent link of a communication device refers to the link between the communication device and the parent node of the communication device.
  • the corresponding relationship between the master and backup communication devices between the first communication device and the second communication device may refer to a pairing relationship or an association relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the communication device in the standby communication device status can take over the transmission task of the corresponding main communication device at any time and continue to perform service transmission.
  • the communication system can ensure the continuity of service transmission by changing the status of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, and can also prevent the communication device from running for a long time, thereby prolonging the service life of the communication device, and further improving the transmission efficiency. Improve the user experience.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device.
  • the structure of the device is as shown in FIG. 27 and includes a communication unit 2701 and a processing unit 2702.
  • the apparatus 2700 can be applied to the first communication device or the network device.
  • the first communication device and the network device may be applicable to the communication system shown in FIG. 1, and may implement the communication methods in the above figures.
  • each unit When the apparatus 2700 is applied to a first communication device, optionally, the functions of each unit are as follows:
  • the communication unit 2701 is configured to send a first state change instruction to a network device, or obtain a first state change instruction, where the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed by the standby communication device Communication equipment, or change from main communication equipment to backup communication equipment; and obtain communication configuration information;
  • the processing unit 2702 is configured to configure a wireless interface according to the communication configuration information.
  • each unit can also be as follows:
  • the processing unit 2702 sends request information to the network device via the communication unit 2701, or receives a query instruction via the communication unit 2701; wherein the request information is used to request: the first communication device becomes the main communication device Device, the query instruction is used to instruct the first communication device to send pairing status information to the network device.
  • the request information includes: the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the first communication device and/or the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the second communication device; where There is a pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the pairing status information includes one or more of the following: an identifier of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and a pairing relationship with the first communication device.
  • the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
  • the communication unit 2701 is specifically configured to: when acquiring the first state change indication:
  • Receiving the first state change instruction sent by a second communication device where the second communication device was a primary communication device or a backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device was changed.
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
  • the third communication device Is the parent node of the first communication device
  • the communication unit 2701 is specifically configured to: when sending the status information to the network device:
  • the identification of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or Main communication equipment; or
  • the identification and status indication of the first communication device are sent to the network device, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is a standby communication device or a main communication device, and the identification of the first communication device is used to notify: the status Indicating that the indicated state is the state of the first communication device; or
  • the main communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device;
  • the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device
  • the indication information of the second communication device is any one of the following: the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, the second communication device
  • the access of the communication equipment returns the integrated node identification code.
  • the communication unit 2701 is specifically configured to: when acquiring the communication configuration information:
  • the second communication device Acquiring the communication configuration information from a second communication device, the second communication device being the master communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed;
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
  • the communication configuration information complete indication After acquiring the communication configuration information from the second communication device, send a communication configuration information complete indication to the network device or a third communication device, where the communication configuration information complete indication is used to notify: the first communication device
  • the complete communication configuration information is stored in the file, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
  • the processing unit 2702 Before receiving the first set of communication configuration information from the network device or the third communication device, after the processing unit 2702 determines that the second set of communication configuration information is stored locally, send it to the network device or the third communication device. 3.
  • the communication device sends a request for communication configuration information
  • the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set
  • the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication
  • the first indication is used to indicate the first communication device
  • the second communication configuration information set has been saved in the, and the second indication is used to indicate that the first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
  • the communication configuration information includes any one or a combination of the following:
  • Wireless resource configuration information of the second communication device data buffered when the second communication device performs data transmission, the network identification of the fourth communication device, the context of the fourth communication device, and the quality of service QoS information of the fourth communication device ,
  • the second communication device is the master communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed
  • the fourth communication device is the first communication device or the second communication device.
  • the first state change indication includes any one or a combination of the following: the identification of the correspondence between the active and standby communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, and the network of the first communication device Identification, the status indication of the first communication device, the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the status indication of the second communication device, and the reason for the status change;
  • the second communication device is the main communication device or the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed.
  • each unit When the apparatus 2700 is applied to a first communication device, optionally, the functions of each unit are as follows:
  • the communication unit 2701 is configured to obtain a first state change instruction, and the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the main communication device, or from the main communication device to the standby communication device. communication device;
  • the processing unit 2702 is configured to perform wireless interface configuration on the first communication device.
  • each unit can also be as follows:
  • the processing unit 2702 receives a request message through the communication unit 2701 or sends a query instruction through the communication unit 2701; wherein the request information is used to request that the first communication device becomes the master communication device, and the query instruction Used to instruct the first communication device to send pairing status information to the network device.
  • the request information includes: the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the first communication device and/or the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the second communication device; where There is a pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  • the pairing status information includes one or more of the following: an identifier of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and a pairing relationship with the first communication device.
  • the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
  • the communication unit 2701 is specifically configured to: when acquiring the first state change indication:
  • the second communication device being the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state change of the first communication device;
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change indication, receive first state information from the first communication device or the third communication device, and the first state information A state information is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, receive second state information from a second communication device or a third communication device, where the second state information is used to notify: 2.
  • the state of the communication device is the master communication device; the processing unit 2702 is further configured to: determine that the backup communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device according to the preset correspondence between the master and backup communication devices , The third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, receive second state information from a second communication device or a third communication device, where the second state information is used to notify: 2.
  • the status of the second communication device is the standby communication device;
  • the processing unit 2702 is further configured to: the network device determines that the main communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the A first communication device, the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send to the first communication device or the third communication device according to the communication device state configuration information stored locally or received from the core network device A status indication, the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send communication device state configuration information to a third communication device, wherein the first communication device is in the communication device state configuration information Is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send communication device status configuration information to the first communication device, where the first communication device is in the communication device status configuration information The status is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send a second state change instruction to the first communication device and/or the third communication device; the second state change instruction is used for Upon notification: the status of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, or the standby communication device is changed to the main communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, receive a second state change instruction from a third communication device; the second state change instruction is used to notify: the first communication device The status of is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, or from the standby communication device to the main communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  • the communication device when the communication device receives the first state information from the first communication device, it is specifically configured to:
  • the identifier of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is ready for communication Equipment or main communication equipment;
  • the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device;
  • the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the identity of the first communication device is used to notify: The state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device; or
  • the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the second communication device
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the main communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device;
  • a status indication and indication information of a second communication device are received from the first communication device, the status indication is used to indicate that the state of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the indication information of the second communication device is used Indicating that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device;
  • the instruction information of the second communication device is any one of the following:
  • the identification of the second communication device the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, and the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the second communication device.
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
  • the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device, and in the communication device state configuration information, the state of the first communication device is configured as the main communication device Equipment or communication equipment; or
  • the processing unit 2702 is specifically configured to: when performing wireless interface configuration on the first communication device:
  • the communication configuration information includes the first communication configuration information set and the second communication configuration information set.
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
  • the communication configuration information request Before sending the second configuration instruction to the third communication device, receive a communication configuration request from the first communication device, where the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, so
  • the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, the first indication is used to indicate that the second communication configuration information set has been saved in the first communication device, and the second indication is used to indicate all The first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
  • the communication configuration information request Before sending the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device, receive a communication configuration request from the first communication device, wherein the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set ,
  • the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, the first indication is used to indicate that the second communication configuration information set has been saved in the first communication device, and the second indication is used to Indicating that the first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
  • the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
  • a complete communication configuration information indication is received from the first communication device, where the complete communication configuration information indication is used to notify that complete communication configuration information is stored in the first communication device.
  • the communication configuration information includes any one or a combination of the following:
  • Radio resource configuration information of the second communication device data buffered when the second communication device performs data transmission, the network identification of the fourth communication device, the context of the fourth communication device, and the quality of service QoS information of the fourth communication device ,
  • the second communication device is the master communication device of the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed
  • the fourth communication device is the first communication device or the second communication device The child node of the device.
  • the first state change indication includes any one or a combination of the following: the identification of the correspondence between the active and standby communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, and the network of the first communication device Identification, the status indication of the first communication device, the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the status indication of the second communication device, and the reason for the status change;
  • the second communication device is the main communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed.
  • each function in each embodiment of this application can be integrated into one processing unit, or it can exist alone physically, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium , Including a number of instructions to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a communication device, which is used to implement the communication methods in the above figures.
  • the communication device 2800 includes a transceiver 2801, a processor 2802, and a memory 2803. Wherein, the transceiver 2801, the processor 2802, and the memory 2803 are connected to each other.
  • the transceiver 2801, the processor 2802, and the memory 2803 are connected to each other through a bus 2804.
  • the bus 2804 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect standard
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 28, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the transceiver 2801 is used to receive and send data, and implement communication with other devices (for example, the child node, parent node, and network device of the communication device).
  • devices for example, the child node, parent node, and network device of the communication device.
  • the communication device 2800 further includes a communication interface 2805, which is used to establish a communication connection with another communication device deployed in the same location and used for changing the active/standby status.
  • a communication interface 2805 which is used to establish a communication connection with another communication device deployed in the same location and used for changing the active/standby status.
  • the processor 2802 is configured to implement the communication methods in the above figures. For details, reference may be made to the description in the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the memory 2803 is used to store program instructions and the like.
  • the program instructions may include program code, and the program code includes computer operation instructions.
  • the memory 2803 may include random access memory (RAM), and may also include non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk memory.
  • the processor 2802 executes the program instructions stored in the memory 2803 to realize the above-mentioned functions, thereby realizing the communication method provided in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a network device, which is used to implement the communication methods in the above figures.
  • the network device 2900 includes: a transceiver 2901, a processor 2902, and a memory 2903. Wherein, the transceiver 2901, the processor 2902, and the memory 2903 are connected to each other.
  • the transceiver 2901, the processor 2902, and the memory 2903 are connected to each other through a bus 2904.
  • the bus 2904 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect standard
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used to represent in FIG. 29, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the transceiver 2901 is used to receive and send data to realize communication with other devices.
  • the network device 2900 further includes a communication interface 2905 for implementing communication with core network devices.
  • the processor 2902 is configured to implement the communication methods in the above figures. For details, reference may be made to the description in the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the memory 2903 is used to store program instructions and the like.
  • the program instructions may include program code, and the program code includes computer operation instructions.
  • the memory 2903 may include random access memory (RAM), and may also include non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk memory.
  • the processor 2902 executes the program instructions stored in the memory 2903 to realize the aforementioned functions, thereby realizing the communication method provided by the aforementioned embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the communication method provided in the above embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a computer storage medium in which a computer program is stored.
  • the computer program executes the communication method provided in the above embodiment.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, which is used to read a computer program stored in a memory to implement the communication method provided in the above embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a chip system including a processor for supporting a computer device to realize the functions related to the communication device or the network device in the above embodiment.
  • the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary programs and data of the computer device.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, or include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method.
  • the communication device in the state of the standby communication device can take over the transmission task of the corresponding main communication device at any time and continue to perform service transmission.
  • the communication system can ensure the continuity of service transmission by changing the status of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, and can also prevent the communication device from running for a long time, thereby prolonging the service life of the communication device, and further improving the transmission efficiency. Improve the user experience.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Therefore, the present application may adopt the form of a complete hardware embodiment, a complete software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware. Moreover, this application may adopt the form of a computer program product implemented on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) containing computer-usable program codes.
  • a computer-usable storage media including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.
  • These computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer-readable memory that can guide a computer or other programmable data processing equipment to work in a specific manner, so that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture including the instruction device.
  • the device implements the functions specified in one process or multiple processes in the flowchart and/or one block or multiple blocks in the block diagram.
  • These computer program instructions can also be loaded on a computer or other programmable data processing equipment, so that a series of operation steps are executed on the computer or other programmable equipment to produce computer-implemented processing, so as to execute on the computer or other programmable equipment.
  • the instructions provide steps for implementing functions specified in a flow or multiple flows in the flowchart and/or a block or multiple blocks in the block diagram.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides a communication method and apparatus. The method can be applied to communication systems, such as V2X, LTE-V, V2V, Internet of Vehicles, MTC, loT, LTE-M, M2M, and Internet of Things. In the method, a communication device whose status is a standby communication device can take over the transmission task of a corresponding main communication device at any time to continue the service transmission. In this way, by means of the status change of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, the communication system can not only ensure the continuity of service transmission, but also avoids the communication device from operating for a long time, so as to prolong the service life of the communication device, thereby further increasing the efficiency of service transmission and improving user experience.

Description

一种通信方法及装置Communication method and device 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
在通信系统中,终端设备可以直接连接或者通过至少一个中继设备连接网络设备,形成一条无线连接,从而使终端设备可以基于该无线连接成功接入网络,最终实现业务通信。In the communication system, the terminal device can be directly connected or connected to the network device through at least one relay device to form a wireless connection, so that the terminal device can successfully access the network based on the wireless connection, and finally realize business communication.
在一些场景中,无线连接中的通信设备(终端设备和/或中继设备)长时间部署在固定位置,为了保证业务传输的连续性,该通信设备常常需要长时间持续工作,这就导致该通信设备的使用寿命降低,并且在通信设备发生故障的情况下,也会导致无线连接中断,进一步业务传输的效率。In some scenarios, the communication equipment (terminal equipment and/or relay equipment) in the wireless connection is deployed in a fixed location for a long time. In order to ensure the continuity of service transmission, the communication equipment often needs to work continuously for a long time. The service life of the communication equipment is reduced, and in the case of a failure of the communication equipment, the wireless connection will be interrupted, which further improves the efficiency of service transmission.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法及装置,用以提高业务传输的效率。The embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device to improve the efficiency of service transmission.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法应用于如图1所示的对通信设备进行双重部署的通信系统中。其中,第一通信设备为双重部署的两个通信设备中的其中一个。该方法具体包括以下步骤:In the first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a communication system with dual deployment of communication devices as shown in FIG. 1. Wherein, the first communication device is one of two communication devices that are dually deployed. The method specifically includes the following steps:
第一通信设备向网络设备发送第一状态变更指示,或者从其他设备获取第一状态变更指示,然后所述第一通信设备可以根据所述第一状态变更指示,变更自身的状态和无线接口配置。其中,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,或者由主通信设备变更为备通信设备。The first communication device sends a first state change instruction to the network device, or obtains the first state change instruction from another device, and then the first communication device can change its own state and wireless interface configuration according to the first state change instruction . Wherein, the first state change indication is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the main communication device, or from the main communication device to the standby communication device.
通过该方法,状态为主通信设备的通信设备也可以随时变更为备通信设备停止执行传输任务,而状态为备通信设备的通信设备可以随时接替对应的主通信设备的传输任务,继续进行业务传输。这样,通信系统通过通信设备的主备通信设备的状态变更,既可以保证业务传输的连续性,又可以避免通信设备长时间运行工作从而延长通信设备的使用寿命,进一步提高约传输的效率,提高了用户的体验。Through this method, the communication device whose status is the master communication device can also be changed to the backup communication device to stop performing transmission tasks at any time, and the communication device whose status is the backup communication device can take over the transmission task of the corresponding master communication device at any time and continue to perform service transmission. . In this way, the communication system can ensure the continuity of service transmission by changing the status of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, and can also prevent the communication device from running for a long time, thereby prolonging the service life of the communication device, and further improving the transmission efficiency. Improve the user experience.
在一个可能的设计中,所述第一通信设备可以从所述网络设备、第三通信设备,或者第二通信设备获取所述第一状态变更指示。其中,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或备通信设备。In a possible design, the first communication device may obtain the first state change indication from the network device, the third communication device, or the second communication device. Wherein, the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device, and the second communication device is the main communication device or backup device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device changes. communication device.
通过该设计可知,通信系统中的网络设备、第三通信设备或者第二通信设备均可以触发通信设备的状态变更,因此,该设计可以使通信系统中通信设备的状态变更触发方式更加灵活。It can be known from this design that the network device, the third communication device, or the second communication device in the communication system can all trigger the state change of the communication device. Therefore, this design can make the state change trigger mode of the communication device in the communication system more flexible.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一状态变更指示之前,所述第一通信设备可以通过以下方式,确定自身当前的状态:In a possible design, before the first communication device sends the first state change instruction to the network device, the first communication device may determine its current state in the following manner:
方式一:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送状态信息,所述状态信息用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备。Manner 1: The first communication device sends status information to the network device or the third communication device, where the status information is used to notify that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
通过该方式,所述第一通信设备可以采用主动向所述网络设备或第三通信设备上报自 身状态的方式进行状态初始化。In this way, the first communication device can initiate state initialization by actively reporting its own state to the network device or the third communication device.
方式二:所述第一通信设备接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 2: The first communication device receives a status indication sent by the network device or a third communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and The third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
通过该方式,网络设备或第三通信设备可以通过发送状态指示的方式,主动对所述第一通信设备进行状态初始化。In this way, the network device or the third communication device can actively initialize the state of the first communication device by sending a status indication.
方式三:所述第一通信设备接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的通信设备状态配置信息,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 3: The first communication device receives the communication device status configuration information sent by the network device or the third communication device, and in the communication device status configuration information, the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device. A communication device, the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
通过该方式,网络设备或第三通信设备可以通过发送通信设备状态配置信息的方式,主动对所述第一通信设备进行状态初始化。In this way, the network device or the third communication device can actively initialize the state of the first communication device by sending the communication device state configuration information.
方式四:所述第一通信设备接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的第二状态变更指示,所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 4: The first communication device receives a second state change instruction sent by the network device or the third communication device, and the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is controlled by the main communication device Change to a backup communication device, or change from a backup communication device to a master communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
通过该方式,可以实现所述第一通信设备状态的多次变更。In this way, multiple changes to the state of the first communication device can be achieved.
在一个可能的设计中,所述第一通信设备可以通过以下方式向所述网络设备发送所述状态信息:In a possible design, the first communication device may send the status information to the network device in the following manner:
方式一:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一通信设备的标识,其中,所述第一通信设备的标识中包含指示字段,所述指示字段用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备。Manner 1: The first communication device sends the identification of the first communication device to the network device, wherein the identification of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate the first communication device. The status of the communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
方式二:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送第二通信设备的指示信息,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为所述第二通信设备。Manner 2: The first communication device sends instruction information of the second communication device to the network device, where the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device Is the second communication device.
方式三:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备。Manner 3: The first communication device sends a status indication to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device.
方式四:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一通信设备的标识和状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第一通信设备的标识用于通知:所述状态指示所指示的状态是第一通信设备的状态。Manner 4: The first communication device sends the identification and status indication of the first communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the first communication device The identifier is used to notify that the state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device.
方式五:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备为所述第二通信设备。Manner 5: The first communication device sends a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device, and the second communication device The instruction information of the communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
方式六:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备。Manner 6: The first communication device sends a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the second communication device The indication information of the communication device is used to indicate that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
在以上方式中,所述第二通信设备的指示信息为以下任一项:所述第二通信设备的标识、所述第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的用户标识、所述第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码。In the above manner, the indication information of the second communication device is any one of the following: the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, The access of the second communication device returns the integrated node identification code.
通过该设计,可以提高所述第一通信设备发送所述状态信息的灵活性。Through this design, the flexibility of the first communication device to send the status information can be improved.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述第一通信设备的状态变更为主通信设备时,所述第一通 信设备获取所述通信配置信息,然后根据所述通信配置信息进行无线接口配置。In a possible design, when the state of the first communication device changes to the master communication device, the first communication device obtains the communication configuration information, and then performs wireless interface configuration according to the communication configuration information.
其中,所述无线接口包括所述第一通信设备与第三通信设备或网络设备之间的无线接口,以及所述第一通信设备与第四通信设备之间的无线接口;所述第四通信设备为所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的子节点。Wherein, the wireless interface includes a wireless interface between the first communication device and a third communication device or a network device, and a wireless interface between the first communication device and a fourth communication device; the fourth communication The device is a child node of the first communication device and the second communication device.
通过该设计,所述第一通信设备可以替换第二通信设备,与所述第二通信设备的子节点、父节点或网络设备建立连接,从而可以接替第二通信设备的传输任务,继续进行业务传输。Through this design, the first communication device can replace the second communication device and establish a connection with the child node, parent node or network device of the second communication device, so that it can take over the transmission task of the second communication device and continue the business transmission.
在一个可能的设计中,所述第一通信设备可以通过以下方式获取所述通信配置信息:In a possible design, the first communication device may obtain the communication configuration information in the following manner:
方式一:所述第一通信设备从第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备。Manner 1: The first communication device obtains the communication configuration information from a second communication device, and the second communication device is the master communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed .
方式二:所述第一通信设备从所述网络设备或第三通信设备接收所述通信配置信息,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 2: The first communication device receives the communication configuration information from the network device or a third communication device, and the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
方式三:所述通信配置信息中包含第一通信配置信息集合和第二通信配置信息集合;所述第一通信设备从所述网络设备或第三通信设备接收所述第一通信配置信息集合,以及所述第一通信设备从所述第二通信设备获取所述第二通信配置信息集合,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 3: The communication configuration information includes a first communication configuration information set and a second communication configuration information set; the first communication device receives the first communication configuration information set from the network device or a third communication device, And the first communication device obtains the second communication configuration information set from the second communication device, and the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
通过该设计,所述第一通信设备可以继承所述第二通信设备的通信配置,从而避免由于配置不对齐导致的无线连接恢复失败,也可以避免网络设备重新对所述第一通信设备进行不必要的通信配置,可以缩短无线连接中断的时间。With this design, the first communication device can inherit the communication configuration of the second communication device, thereby avoiding wireless connection recovery failures caused by configuration misalignment, and also preventing the network device from re-disabling the first communication device. The necessary communication configuration can shorten the time when the wireless connection is interrupted.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述第一通信设备从所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息之后,所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送通信配置信息完整指示,以通知所述第一通信设备中保存完整的所述通信配置信息,无需再对所述第一通信设备进行通信配置。In a possible design, after the first communication device obtains the communication configuration information from the second communication device, the first communication device sends the complete communication configuration information to the network device or the third communication device An instruction to notify the first communication device to save the complete communication configuration information, and no need to perform communication configuration on the first communication device.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述第一通信设备从所述网络设备或所述第三通信设备接收所述通信配置信息之前,所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送通信配置信息请求。通过该设计,所述第一通信设备可以在自身未保存通信配置信息时,或者在保存的通信配置信息不完整时,或者保存的通信配置信息不是最新的通信配置信息时,向其他设备请求最新的完整的通信配置信息,以成功建立无线连接。In a possible design, before the first communication device receives the communication configuration information from the network device or the third communication device, the first communication device sends the information to the network device or the third communication device. Send a communication configuration information request. With this design, the first communication device can request the latest communication configuration information from other devices when it does not save the communication configuration information itself, or when the saved communication configuration information is incomplete, or when the saved communication configuration information is not the latest communication configuration information. The complete communication configuration information to successfully establish a wireless connection.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述第一通信设备从所述网络设备或所述第三通信设备接收所述第一通信配置信息集合之前,所述第一通信设备确定本地保存所述第二通信配置信息集合时,向所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送通信配置信息请求;其中,所述通信配置信息请求用于请求所述第一通信配置信息集合,所述通信配置信息请求中包含第一指示或第二指示,所述第一指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中已经保存所述第二通信配置信息集合,所述第二指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中未保存所述第一通信配置信息集合。In a possible design, before the first communication device receives the first communication configuration information set from the network device or the third communication device, the first communication device determines to locally save the second When the communication configuration information is set, a communication configuration information request is sent to the network device or a third communication device; wherein the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, and the communication configuration information request includes The first instruction or the second instruction, the first instruction is used to indicate that the second communication configuration information set has been saved in the first communication device, and the second instruction is used to indicate that the first communication device has not Saving the first communication configuration information set.
通过该设计,所述第一通信设备可以在保存部分通信配置信息时,从所述网络设备或第三通信设备请求另一部分通信配置信息,避免从所述网络设备或第三通信设备获取完整的通信配置信息,造成不必要的信令开销。Through this design, the first communication device can request another part of the communication configuration information from the network device or the third communication device when saving part of the communication configuration information, avoiding obtaining complete information from the network device or the third communication device Communication configuration information causes unnecessary signaling overhead.
在一个可能的设计中,所述通信配置信息包含以下任意一项或组合:In a possible design, the communication configuration information includes any one or a combination of the following:
第二通信设备的无线资源配置信息、第二通信设备进行数据传输时缓存的数据、第四通信设备的网络标识、所述第四通信设备的上下文、所述第四通信设备的服务质量QoS信 息、所述第四通信设备的数据无线承载标识DRB ID、所述第四通信设备的无线资源配置信息;其中,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备,所述第四通信设备是所述第一通信设备或所述第二通信设备的子节点。Wireless resource configuration information of the second communication device, data buffered when the second communication device performs data transmission, the network identification of the fourth communication device, the context of the fourth communication device, and the quality of service QoS information of the fourth communication device , The data radio bearer ID DRB ID of the fourth communication device, and the radio resource configuration information of the fourth communication device; wherein the second communication device is the first communication device before the state of the first communication device changes. A master communication device corresponding to a communication device, where the fourth communication device is a child node of the first communication device or the second communication device.
在一个可能的设计中,所述第一状态变更指示中包含以下任意一项或组合:主备通信设备对应关系标识、所述第一通信设备的标识、所述第一通信设备的网络标识、所述第一通信设备的状态指示、第二通信设备的标识、第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的状态指示、状态变更原因指示;其中,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或备通信设备。In a possible design, the first state change indication includes any one or a combination of the following: the identification of the correspondence between the active and standby communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, the network identification of the first communication device, The status indication of the first communication device, the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the status indication of the second communication device, and the indication of the reason for the status change; wherein the second communication device is Before the state of the first communication device is changed, it is the main communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device.
第二方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信方法,该方法应用于如图1所示的对通信设备进行双重部署的通信系统中。其中,第一通信设备为双重部署的两个通信设备中的其中一个。该方法具体包括以下步骤:In the second aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication method, which is applied to a communication system with dual deployment of communication devices as shown in FIG. 1. Wherein, the first communication device is one of two communication devices that are dually deployed. The method specifically includes the following steps:
网络设备获取第一状态变更指示;然后,所述网络设备根据第一状态变更指示通知的所述第一通信设备的变更后的状态,对所述第一通信设备进行无线接口配置。其中,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,或者由主通信设备变更为备通信设备。The network device obtains the first state change instruction; then, the network device performs wireless interface configuration on the first communication device according to the changed state of the first communication device notified by the first state change instruction. Wherein, the first state change indication is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the main communication device, or from the main communication device to the standby communication device.
通过该方法,状态为主通信设备的通信设备也可以随时变更为备通信设备停止执行传输任务,而状态为备通信设备的通信设备可以随时接替对应的主通信设备的传输任务,继续进行业务传输。这样,通信系统通过通信设备的主备通信设备的状态变更,既可以保证业务传输的连续性,又可以避免通信设备长时间运行工作从而延长通信设备的使用寿命,进一步提高约传输的效率,提高了用户的体验。Through this method, the communication device whose status is the master communication device can also be changed to the backup communication device to stop performing transmission tasks at any time, and the communication device whose status is the backup communication device can take over the transmission task of the corresponding master communication device at any time and continue to perform service transmission. . In this way, the communication system can ensure the continuity of service transmission by changing the status of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, and can also prevent the communication device from running for a long time, thereby prolonging the service life of the communication device, and further improving the transmission efficiency. Improve the user experience.
在一个可能的设计中,所述网络设备可以通过从以下任一个设备获取所述第一状态变更指示:In a possible design, the network device may obtain the first state change indication from any of the following devices:
所述第一通信设备、第二通信设备、第三通信设备、核心网设备,以及本地。The first communication device, the second communication device, the third communication device, the core network device, and the local device.
通过该设计可知,通信系统中的网络设备、第三通信设备、第一通信设备或者第二通信设备均可以触发通信设备的状态变更,因此,该设计可以使通信系统中通信设备的状态变更触发方式更加灵活。It can be seen from this design that the network device, the third communication device, the first communication device or the second communication device in the communication system can all trigger the state change of the communication device. Therefore, this design can trigger the state change of the communication device in the communication system. The way is more flexible.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述网络设备接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,所述网络设备可以通过以下方式,确定所述第一通信设备当前的状态:In a possible design, before the network device receives the first state change indication, the network device may determine the current state of the first communication device in the following manner:
方式一:所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备或第三通信设备接收第一状态信息,所述第一状态信息用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 1: The network device receives first state information from the first communication device or the third communication device, and the first state information is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device Device, the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
通过该方式,所述网络设备通过第一通信设备或第三通信设备上报的第一通信设备的状态对所述第一通信设备的状态进行初始化。In this way, the network device initializes the state of the first communication device through the state of the first communication device reported by the first communication device or the third communication device.
方式二:所述网络设备从第二通信设备或第三通信设备接收第二状态信息,所述第二状态信息用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述网络设备根据预设的主备通信设备对应关系,确定所述第二通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第一通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 2: The network device receives second status information from a second communication device or a third communication device, and the second status information is used to notify: the status of the second communication device is the master communication device, and the network device According to the preset correspondence between the main and standby communication devices, it is determined that the standby communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
通过该方式,所述网络设备通过第二通信设备或第三通信设备上报的第二通信设备的状态,对所述第一通信设备的状态进行初始化。In this way, the network device initializes the state of the first communication device through the state of the second communication device reported by the second communication device or the third communication device.
方式三:所述网络设备从第二通信设备或第三通信设备接收第二状态信息,所述第二 状态信息用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备,所述网络设备根据预设的主备通信设备对应关系,确定所述第二通信设备对应的主通信设备为所述第一通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 3: The network device receives second state information from a second communication device or a third communication device, and the second state information is used to notify: the state of the second communication device is a standby communication device, and the network device According to the preset correspondence between the main and standby communication devices, it is determined that the main communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
通过该方式,所述网络设备通过第二通信设备或第三通信设备上报的第二通信设备的状态,对所述第一通信设备的状态进行初始化。In this way, the network device initializes the state of the first communication device through the state of the second communication device reported by the second communication device or the third communication device.
方式四:所述网络设备根据本地保存或者从核心网设备接收的通信设备状态配置信息,向所述第一通信设备或第三通信设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 4: The network device sends a status indication to the first communication device or the third communication device according to the communication device status configuration information stored locally or received from the core network device, and the status indication is used to indicate the first communication device or the third communication device. The state of the communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
通过该方式,所述网络设备可以依据通信设备状态配置信息以及通过发送状态指示的方式,对第一通信设备的状态进行初始化。In this way, the network device can initialize the state of the first communication device according to the state configuration information of the communication device and by sending a state indication.
方式五:所述网络设备向第三通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,其中,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 5: The network device sends communication device status configuration information to a third communication device, where the status of the first communication device in the communication device status configuration information is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the first communication device The third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
通过该方式,所述网络设备依据并发送通信设备状态配置信息,实现对第一通信设备的状态进行初始化。In this way, the network device implements the initialization of the state of the first communication device according to and sending the state configuration information of the communication device.
方式六:所述网络设备向所述第一通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备。Manner 6: The network device sends communication device state configuration information to the first communication device, and in the communication device state configuration information, the state of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
通过该方式,所述网络设备可以依据并发送通信设备状态配置信息,实现对第一通信设备的状态进行初始化。In this way, the network device can realize the initialization of the state of the first communication device according to and send the state configuration information of the communication device.
方式七:所述网络设备向所述第一通信设备和/或第三通信设备发送第二状态变更指示;所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备;所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 7: The network device sends a second state change instruction to the first communication device and/or the third communication device; the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is communicated by the master The device is changed to a standby communication device, or the standby communication device is changed to a master communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
方式八:所述网络设备从第三通信设备接收第二状态变更指示;所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备;所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Manner 8: The network device receives a second state change instruction from a third communication device; the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, or The standby communication device is changed to the master communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
通过方式七和八,可以实现所述第一通信设备状态的多次变更。Through manners 7 and 8, multiple changes of the state of the first communication device can be realized.
在一个可能的设计中,所述网络设备可以通过以下方式,从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一状态信息:In a possible design, the network device may receive the first state information from the first communication device in the following manner:
方式一:所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的标识,其中,所述第一通信设备的标识中包含指示字段,所述指示字段用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备。Manner 1: The network device receives the identification of the first communication device from the first communication device, wherein the identification of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate the first communication device. The status of the communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
方式二:所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收第二通信设备的指示信息,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为第二通信设备。Manner 2: The network device receives the instruction information of the second communication device from the first communication device, and the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate the main communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device It is the second communication device.
方式三:所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备。Manner 3: The network device receives a status indication from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device.
方式四:所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的标识和状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第一通信设备的标识用于 通知:所述状态指示所指示的状态是第一通信设备的状态。Manner 4: The network device receives the identification and status indication of the first communication device from the first communication device, and the status indication is used to indicate that the status is a standby communication device or a main communication device, and the first communication device The identifier is used to notify that the state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device.
方式五:所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为所述第二通信设备。Manner 5: The network device receives a status indication and indication information of a second communication device from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, The indication information of the second communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
方式六:所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备。Mode 6: The network device receives a status indication and indication information of a second communication device from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the primary communication device, and the second The indication information of the communication device is used to indicate that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
在以上方式中,所述第二通信设备的指示信息为以下任一项:所述第二通信设备的标识、所述第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的用户标识、所述第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码。In the above manner, the indication information of the second communication device is any one of the following: the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, The access of the second communication device returns the integrated node identification code.
通过该设计,可以提高所述第一通信设备发送所述状态信息的灵活性。Through this design, the flexibility of the first communication device to send the status information can be improved.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述网络设备获取所述第一状态变更指示之后,所述网络设备向第三通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,或者向第三通信设备发送所述第一状态变更指示,In a possible design, after the network device obtains the first status change indication, the network device sends communication device status configuration information to a third communication device, or sends the first status to a third communication device Change instructions,
通过该设计,可以使所述第三通信设备接收的信息,对自身保存的通信设备状态配置信息进行更新。Through this design, the information received by the third communication device can update the state configuration information of the communication device saved by itself.
在一个可能的设计,当所述第一通信设备的状态变更为主通信设备时,所述网络设备可以通过如下方式,对所述第一通信设备进行无线接口配置:In a possible design, when the state of the first communication device changes to the master communication device, the network device can configure the wireless interface of the first communication device in the following manner:
方式一:所述网络设备向所述第一通信设备发送通信配置信息。Manner 1: The network device sends communication configuration information to the first communication device.
方式二:所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送第一配置指示,所述第一配置指示用于通知所述第三通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送通信配置信息。Manner 2: The network device sends a first configuration instruction to the third communication device, where the first configuration instruction is used to notify the third communication device to send communication configuration information to the first communication device.
方式三:所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送第二配置指示,所述第二配置指示用于通知所述第三通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送第一通信配置信息集合。Manner 3: The network device sends a second configuration instruction to the third communication device, where the second configuration instruction is used to notify the third communication device to send the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device.
方式四:所述网络设备向所述第一通信设备发送第一通信配置信息集合。Manner 4: The network device sends the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device.
其中,在方式三和四中,通信配置信息中包含所述第一通信配置信息集合和第二通信配置信息集合。Wherein, in the third and fourth modes, the communication configuration information includes the first communication configuration information set and the second communication configuration information set.
通过该设计,所述网络设备可以使所述第一通信设备继承所述第二通信设备的通信配置,从而避免由于配置不对齐导致的无线连接恢复失败,也可以避免网络设备重新对所述第一通信设备进行不必要的通信配置,可以缩短无线连接中断的时间。Through this design, the network device can make the first communication device inherit the communication configuration of the second communication device, thereby avoiding the failure of wireless connection recovery caused by configuration misalignment, and can also prevent the network device from reconnecting to the second communication device. The unnecessary communication configuration of a communication device can shorten the time of wireless connection interruption.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述网络设备向所述第一通信设备发送通信配置信息之前,所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收通信配置信息请求。In a possible design, before the network device sends the communication configuration information to the first communication device, the network device receives a communication configuration information request from the first communication device.
通过该设计,所述第一通信设备可以通过主动请求的方式获取所述通信配置信息。With this design, the first communication device can obtain the communication configuration information through an active request.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送所述第一配置指示之前,所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收通信配置信息请求。In a possible design, before the network device sends the first configuration instruction to the third communication device, the network device receives a communication configuration information request from the first communication device.
通过该设计,所述第一通信设备可以通过主动请求的方式获取所述通信配置信息。With this design, the first communication device can obtain the communication configuration information through an active request.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送所述第二配置指示之前,所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收通信配置请求,其中,所述通信配置信息请求用于请求所述第一通信配置信息集合,所述通信配置信息请求中包含第一指示或第二指示,所述第一指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中已经保存所述第二通信配置信息集合,所述第 二指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中未保存所述第一通信配置信息集合。In a possible design, before the network device sends the second configuration instruction to the third communication device, the network device receives a communication configuration request from the first communication device, where the communication configuration The information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, and the first indication is used to indicate that the first communication device has saved the first communication device. 2. A set of communication configuration information, where the second indication is used to indicate that the first set of communication configuration information is not saved in the first communication device.
通过该设计,所述第一通信设备可以在保存部分通信配置信息时,请求所述网络设备配置另一部分通信配置信息,避免所述网络设备配置完整的通信配置信息造成不必要的信令开销。Through this design, the first communication device can request the network device to configure another part of the communication configuration information when saving part of the communication configuration information, avoiding unnecessary signaling overhead caused by the configuration of the complete communication configuration information by the network device.
在一个可能的设计中,在所述网络设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一通信配置信息集合之前,所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收通信配置请求,其中,所述通信配置信息请求用于请求所述第一通信配置信息集合,所述通信配置信息请求中包含第一指示或第二指示,所述第一指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中已经保存所述第二通信配置信息集合,所述第二指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中未保存所述第一通信配置信息集合。In a possible design, before the network device sends the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device, the network device receives a communication configuration request from the first communication device, wherein the The communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, and the first indication is used to indicate that the first communication device has saved all information. The second communication configuration information set, and the second indication is used to indicate that the first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
通过该设计,所述第一通信设备可以在保存部分通信配置信息时,请求所述网络设备配置另一部分通信配置信息,避免所述网络设备配置完整的通信配置信息造成不必要的信令开销。Through this design, the first communication device can request the network device to configure another part of the communication configuration information when saving part of the communication configuration information, avoiding unnecessary signaling overhead caused by the configuration of the complete communication configuration information by the network device.
在一个可能的设计中,当所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收通信配置信息完整指示时,所述网络设备不为所述第一通信设备配置通信配置信息,所述通信配置信息完整指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备中保存完整的通信配置信息。In a possible design, when the network device receives a complete indication of the communication configuration information from the first communication device, the network device does not configure the communication configuration information for the first communication device, and the communication configuration information is complete The indication is used to notify: complete communication configuration information is stored in the first communication device.
通过该设计,在第一通信设备保存有完整的通信配置信息时,避免网络设备再次为所述第一通信设备配置通信配置信息。With this design, when the first communication device saves complete communication configuration information, it is avoided that the network device configures the communication configuration information for the first communication device again.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法应用于如图1所示的对通信设备进行双重部署的通信系统中。其中,第一通信设备为双重部署的两个通信设备中的其中一个。该方法具体包括以下步骤:In the third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a communication system with dual deployment of communication devices as shown in FIG. 1. Wherein, the first communication device is one of two communication devices that are dually deployed. The method specifically includes the following steps:
第一通信设备向网络设备发送请求信息,以请求成为主通信设备;或者The first communication device sends request information to the network device to request to become the master communication device; or
网络设备向所述第一通信设备发送查询指示,以通知所述第一通信设备主动上报配对状态信息。The network device sends a query instruction to the first communication device to notify the first communication device to actively report pairing status information.
通过该方法,所述网络设备与所述第一通信设备两侧可以实现同步更新所述第一通信设备的状态,以及与所述第一通信设备之间存在配对关系的第二通信设备状态。With this method, both sides of the network device and the first communication device can synchronize the update of the state of the first communication device and the state of the second communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device.
在一个可能的设计中,所述请求信息包含:所述第一通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码和/或第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码;其中,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间存在配对关系。In a possible design, the request information includes: the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the first communication device and/or the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the second communication device; where There is a pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
在一个可能的设计中,所述配对状态信息包含以下的一项或多项:与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的标识、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的IAB节点识别码、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的C-RNTI、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的状态指示。其中,所述状态指示用于指示与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的状态为备通信设备或主通信设备。In a possible design, the pairing status information includes one or more of the following: an identification of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device The IAB node identification code of, the C-RNTI of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and the status indication of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device. Wherein, the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行以上第一方面或第二方面中各个步骤的单元。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a unit for performing each step in the above first aspect or second aspect.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信设备,包括至少一个处理元件和至少一个存储元件,其中该至少一个存储元件用于存储程序和数据,该至少一个处理元件用于执行本申请第一方面中提供的方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including at least one processing element and at least one storage element, wherein the at least one storage element is used to store programs and data, and the at least one processing element is used to execute The method provided in one aspect.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种网络设备,包括至少一个处理元件和至少一个存储元件,其中该至少一个存储元件用于存储程序和数据,该至少一个处理元件用于执行本 申请第二方面中提供的方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a network device, including at least one processing element and at least one storage element, wherein the at least one storage element is used to store programs and data, and the at least one processing element is used to execute the first The method provided in the two aspects.
第七方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行上述任一方面提供的方法。In a seventh aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in any of the foregoing aspects.
第八方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得所述计算机执行上述任一方面提供的方法。In an eighth aspect, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer storage medium in which a computer program is stored. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method provided in any of the above aspects. .
第九方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片,所述芯片用于读取存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行上述任一方面提供的方法。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, which is used to read a computer program stored in a memory and execute the method provided in any one of the foregoing aspects.
第十方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,用于支持计算机装置实现上述任一方面提供的方法。在一种可能的设计中,所述芯片系统还包括存储器,所述存储器用于保存该计算机装置必要的程序和数据。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip system, which includes a processor, and is configured to support a computer device to implement the method provided in any one of the foregoing aspects. In a possible design, the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary programs and data of the computer device. The chip system can be composed of chips, or can include chips and other discrete devices.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的架构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备接入网络流程图;FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a communication device accessing a network according to an embodiment of the application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信设备的状态初始化流程图;FIG. 3 is a flowchart of state initialization of the first communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的第二种通信设备的状态初始化流程图;FIG. 4 is a flowchart of state initialization of a second communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的第三种通信设备的状态初始化流程图;FIG. 5 is a state initialization flowchart of a third communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的第四种通信设备的状态初始化流程图;FIG. 6 is a flowchart of state initialization of a fourth communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的第五种通信设备的状态初始化流程图;FIG. 7 is a flowchart of state initialization of a fifth communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的第六种通信设备的状态初始化流程图;FIG. 8 is a state initialization flowchart of a sixth communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的第七种通信设备的状态初始化流程图;FIG. 9 is a flowchart of state initialization of a seventh communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的第八种通信设备的状态初始化流程图;FIG. 10 is a flowchart of state initialization of an eighth communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信设备的状态初始化流程图;FIG. 11 is a flowchart of state initialization of the first communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信设备的状态变更触发的流程图;FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the first state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信设备的状态变更触发的流程图;FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the first state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的第二种通信设备的状态变更触发的流程图;FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a second type of state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的第三种通信设备的状态变更触发的流程图;FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a third type of state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的第四种通信设备的状态变更触发的流程图;FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a fourth type of state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图17为本申请实施例提供的第五种通信设备的状态变更触发的流程图;FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a fifth type of state change triggering of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图18为本申请实施例提供的第一种配置无线接口的流程图;FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the first wireless interface configuration provided by an embodiment of the application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的第二种配置无线接口的流程图;FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the second configuration of a wireless interface provided by an embodiment of this application;
图20为本申请实施例提供的第一种获取通信配置信息的流程图;FIG. 20 is the first flow chart for obtaining communication configuration information according to an embodiment of this application;
图21为本申请实施例提供的第二种获取通信配置信息的流程图;FIG. 21 is a second flow chart of obtaining communication configuration information according to an embodiment of this application;
图22为本申请实施例提供的第三种获取通信配置信息的流程图;FIG. 22 is a third flow chart of obtaining communication configuration information provided by an embodiment of this application;
图23为本申请实施例提供的第四种获取通信配置信息的流程图;FIG. 23 is a fourth flow chart for obtaining communication configuration information according to an embodiment of this application;
图24为本申请实施例提供的第五种获取通信配置信息的流程图;FIG. 24 is a fifth flow chart of obtaining communication configuration information provided by an embodiment of this application;
图25为本申请实施例提供的第六种获取通信配置信息的流程图;FIG. 25 is a sixth flow chart of obtaining communication configuration information according to an embodiment of this application;
图26为本申请实施例提供的第七种获取通信配置信息的流程图;FIG. 26 is a seventh flow chart of obtaining communication configuration information according to an embodiment of this application;
图27为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构图;FIG. 27 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图28为本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备的结构图;FIG. 28 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application;
图29为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构图。FIG. 29 is a structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
具体实施方式detailed description
本申请提供了一种通信方法及装置,用以提高业务传输的效率。其中,方法和设备是基于同一发明构思的,由于方法及设备解决问题的原理相似,因此设备与方法的实施可以相互参见,重复之处不再赘述。This application provides a communication method and device to improve the efficiency of service transmission. Among them, the method and the device are based on the same inventive concept. Since the principles of the method and the device to solve the problem are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and the repetition will not be repeated.
在本申请实施例提供的方案中,状态为备通信设备的通信设备可以随时接替对应的主通信设备的传输任务,继续进行业务传输。这样,通信系统通过通信设备的主备通信设备的状态变更,既可以保证业务传输的连续性,又可以避免通信设备长时间运行工作从而延长通信设备的使用寿命,进一步提高约传输的效率,提高了用户的体验。In the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the communication device in the standby communication device status can take over the transmission task of the corresponding main communication device at any time and continue to perform service transmission. In this way, the communication system can ensure the continuity of service transmission by changing the status of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, and can also prevent the communication device from running for a long time, thereby prolonging the service life of the communication device, and further improving the transmission efficiency. Improve the user experience.
以下,对本申请中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便与本领域技术人员理解。Hereinafter, some terms in this application will be explained to facilitate understanding with those skilled in the art.
1)、网络设备,是通信系统中将终端设备接入到无线网络的设备。所述网络设备作为无线接入网中的节点,又可以称为基站,还可以称为无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点(或设备)。1) Network equipment is the equipment in the communication system that connects terminal equipment to the wireless network. As a node in a radio access network, the network device may also be referred to as a base station, or may also be referred to as a radio access network (RAN) node (or device).
目前,一些网络设备的举例为:gNB、传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、接入点(access point,AP)基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB),或基带单元(base band unit,BBU),企业LTE离散窄带聚合(Enterprise LTE Discrete Spectrum Aggregation,eLTE-DSA)基站等。At present, some examples of network equipment are: gNB, transmission reception point (TRP), evolved Node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (Node B) B, NB), access point (access point, AP) base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), or baseband unit (BBU), Enterprise LTE Discrete Spectrum Aggregation (eLTE-DSA) base station, etc.
另外,在一种网络结构中,所述网络设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit,CU)节点和分布单元(distributed unit,DU)节点。这种结构将长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统中eNB的协议层拆分开,部分协议层的功能放在CU集中控制,剩下部分或全部协议层的功能分布在DU中,由CU集中控制DU。In addition, in a network structure, the network device may include a centralized unit (CU) node and a distributed unit (DU) node. This structure splits the protocol layer of the eNB in the long-term evolution (LTE) system. Some of the protocol layer functions are placed under the centralized control of the CU, and some or all of the protocol layer functions are distributed in the DU. Centralized control of DU.
2)、终端设备,是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备。终端设备又可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等。2) Terminal equipment is a device that provides users with voice and/or data connectivity. Terminal equipment may also be called user equipment (UE), mobile station (MS), mobile terminal (MT), and so on.
例如,终端设备可以为具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、车载设备等。目前,一些终端设备的举例为:手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、智能销售终端(point of sale,POS)、可穿戴设备,虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、各类智能仪表(智能水表、智能电表、智能燃气表)、eLTE-DSA UE、具有接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)能力的设备等。For example, the terminal device may be a handheld device with a wireless connection function, a vehicle-mounted device, etc. At present, some examples of terminal equipment are: mobile phones (mobile phones), tablet computers, notebook computers, handheld computers, mobile internet devices (MID), smart point of sale (POS), wearable devices, Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, industrial control (industrial control) wireless terminals, unmanned driving (self-driving) wireless terminals, remote medical surgery) The wireless terminal in the smart grid, the wireless terminal in the smart grid, the wireless terminal in the transportation safety, the wireless terminal in the smart city, the wireless terminal in the smart home, each Class smart meters (smart water meters, smart electricity meters, smart gas meters), eLTE-DSA UE, equipment with integrated access and backhaul (IAB) capabilities, etc.
3)、中继设备,具有桥接功能,能够与终端设备、网络设备,或者其他中继设备建立无线连接的设备。在终端设备与网络设备之间物理距离较大或存在障碍物的情况下,终端 设备无法直接连接网络设备,那么可以在终端设备和网络设备之间部署至少一个中继设备,形成多跳通信,从而实现终端设备和网络设备之间的无线连接。3) Relay equipment, a device that has a bridging function and can establish a wireless connection with terminal equipment, network equipment, or other relay equipment. When the physical distance between the terminal device and the network device is large or there are obstacles, the terminal device cannot directly connect to the network device, then at least one relay device can be deployed between the terminal device and the network device to form multi-hop communication. So as to realize the wireless connection between the terminal equipment and the network equipment.
中继设备的物理形式可以为终端设备、网桥、网络设备(例如微基站、AP等)、接入回传一体化IAB节点(node)、客户终端设备(customer premises equipment,CPE)、具有接入回传一体化能力的设备等,本申请对此不作限定。The physical form of relay equipment can be terminal equipment, network bridge, network equipment (such as micro base station, AP, etc.), access backhaul integrated IAB node (node), customer premises equipment (CPE), with access This application is not limited to equipment with integrated capabilities for incoming and return transmission.
4)、通信设备,是为了便于描述,终端设备和中继设备的统称。因此,在本申请实施例中,具体提到的第一通信设备、第二通信设备等可以是终端设备,也可以是中继设备,本申请对此不作限定。4) Communication equipment is a collective term for terminal equipment and relay equipment for ease of description. Therefore, in the embodiments of the present application, the first communication device, the second communication device, etc. specifically mentioned may be terminal devices or relay devices, which is not limited in this application.
5)、核心网设备,为在核心网中负责移动性管理或路径管理等控制管理功能的设备。可选的,所述核心网设备可以为移动管理实体(mobility management entity,MME),或者控制面功能(control plane function,CPF)实体等。5) The core network equipment is the equipment responsible for control and management functions such as mobility management or path management in the core network. Optionally, the core network equipment may be a mobility management entity (mobility management entity, MME), or a control plane function (control plane function, CPF) entity, etc.
6)、通信设备的父节点,为在多跳通信的无线连接中该通信设备所接入的通信设备。6) The parent node of the communication device is the communication device accessed by the communication device in the wireless connection of multi-hop communication.
7)、通信设备的子节点,为在多跳通信的无线连接中接入该通信设备的通信设备。7) The child node of a communication device is a communication device that accesses the communication device in a wireless connection of multi-hop communication.
8)、主通信设备,处于有意愿开启特定功能,或者已开启特定功能,或者被指定开启特定功能,或者有意愿激活特定功能,或者已激活特定功能,或者被指定激活特定功能的状态的通信设备。例如:若通信设备是具有中继能力的设备,主通信设备指的是有意愿开启中继功能,或者已开启中继功能,或者被指定开启中继功能,或者有意愿激活中继功能,或者已激活中继功能,或者被指定激活中继功能的设备。又例如:若通信设备是具有IAB能力的设备,主通信设备指的是有意愿开启接入回传一体化IAB,或者已开启IAB,或者被指定开启IAB,或者有意愿激活IAB,或者已激活IAB,或者被指定激活IAB的设备。例如,主通信设备是IAB节点。8). The main communication device is in a state where it is willing to turn on a specific function, or has turned on a specific function, or is designated to turn on a specific function, or is willing to activate a specific function, or has activated a specific function, or is designated to activate a specific function. equipment. For example: if the communication device is a device with relay capability, the main communication device refers to the willingness to turn on the relay function, or the relay function has been turned on, or the relay function is designated to be turned on, or the relay function is willing to be activated, or The relay function has been activated, or a device designated to activate the relay function. Another example: if the communication device is a device with IAB capability, the main communication device refers to the willingness to turn on the access backhaul integrated IAB, or the IAB is turned on, or the IAB is designated to be turned on, or the IAB is willing to be activated, or activated IAB, or a device designated to activate IAB. For example, the main communication device is an IAB node.
9)、备通信设备,处于无意愿开启特定功能,或者有意愿关闭特定功能,或者已关闭特定功能,或者被指定关闭特定功能,或者未开启特定功能,或者未激活特定功能,或者无意愿激活特定功能,或者有意愿去激活特定功能,或者已去激活特定功能的状态的通信设备。例如:若通信设备是具有中继能力的设备,备通信设备指的是无意愿开启中继功能,或者有意愿关闭中继功能,或者已关闭中继功能,或者被指定关闭中继功能,或者未开启中继功能,或者未激活中继功能,或者无意愿激活中继功能,或者有意愿去激活中继功能,或者已去激活中继功能的设备。例如:若通信设备是具备IAB能力的设备,备通信设备指的是无意愿开启接入回传一体化IAB,或者有意愿关闭IAB,或者已关闭IAB,或者被指定关闭IAB,或者无意愿激活IAB,或者有意愿去激活IAB,或者已去激活IAB,或者未开启IAB,或者未激活IAB的设备。例如,备通信设备是UE或者eLTE-DSA UE。9). The standby communication equipment is unwilling to turn on specific functions, or willing to turn off specific functions, or has turned off specific functions, or is designated to turn off specific functions, or does not turn on specific functions, or does not activate specific functions, or does not intend to activate A specific function, or a communication device that is willing to deactivate a specific function, or has deactivated a specific function. For example: if the communication device is a device with relay capability, the standby communication device refers to unwillingly turn on the relay function, or willing to turn off the relay function, or has turned off the relay function, or is designated to turn off the relay function, or The relay function is not turned on, or the relay function is not activated, or the relay function is unwilling to activate, or the relay function is willing to be deactivated, or the relay function has been deactivated. For example: if the communication device is a device with IAB capability, the standby communication device refers to unwillingly turn on the access backhaul integrated IAB, or willing to close IAB, or closed IAB, or designated to close IAB, or unwilling to activate IAB, or a device that is willing to deactivate IAB, or has deactivated IAB, or has not opened IAB, or has not activated IAB. For example, the standby communication device is a UE or eLTE-DSA UE.
另外,需要理解的是,在本申请的描述中,“第一”、“第二”等词汇,仅用于区分描述的目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性,也不能理解为指示或暗示顺序。In addition, it should be understood that in the description of this application, words such as “first” and “second” are only used for the purpose of distinguishing description, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance, nor can it be understood as indicating Or imply the order.
下面结合附图对本申请实施例进行说明。The embodiments of the present application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
图1示出了本申请实施例提供的通信方法适用的一种可能的通信系统的架构。参阅图1所示,该通信系统包括:接入网、核心网以及数据网络(data network,DN)。FIG. 1 shows the architecture of a possible communication system to which the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applicable. Referring to FIG. 1, the communication system includes: an access network, a core network, and a data network (DN).
接入网,为终端设备提供无线接入有关的服务,从而将终端设备汇聚接入到核心网,最终实现与数据网络的连接。其中,所述无线接入网中包括网络设备和中继设备。The access network provides wireless access-related services for terminal equipment, so that the terminal equipment can be converged and connected to the core network and finally connected to the data network. Wherein, the wireless access network includes network equipment and relay equipment.
终端设备在实现业务之前,需要接入所述网络设备,与网络设备建立无线连接,从而 实现与网络设备之间的数据传输,以使网络设备为所述终端设备提供无线接入服务。Before a terminal device implements a service, it needs to access the network device and establish a wireless connection with the network device, so as to realize data transmission with the network device, so that the network device provides wireless access services for the terminal device.
可选的,当终端设备处于网络设备的覆盖范围内,且所述终端设备接收到的网络设备的信号的信号质量较强时,所述终端设备可以直接与所述网络设备建立无线连接,如图1所示的终端设备a。Optionally, when the terminal device is within the coverage of the network device, and the signal quality of the network device signal received by the terminal device is relatively strong, the terminal device may directly establish a wireless connection with the network device, such as The terminal device a shown in Figure 1.
可选的,当终端设备不在网络设备的覆盖范围内,或者终端设备在网络设备的覆盖范围边缘(即终端设备接收到的网络设备的信号的信号质量较差)时,所述终端设备可以通过一个或多个中继设备与所述网络设备建立无线连接,形成多跳通信,如图1所示的终端设备b和终端设备c。Optionally, when the terminal device is not within the coverage of the network device, or the terminal device is at the edge of the coverage of the network device (that is, the signal quality of the network device signal received by the terminal device is poor), the terminal device can pass through One or more relay devices establish a wireless connection with the network device to form multi-hop communication, such as terminal device b and terminal device c shown in FIG. 1.
核心网,通过核心网设备实现会话管理、接入与移动性管理,以及策略控制等功能,以及转发终端设备的用户面数据。The core network implements functions such as session management, access and mobility management, and policy control through core network equipment, as well as forwarding user plane data of terminal equipment.
所述DN,通过与所述终端设备进行数据传输,为所述终端设备提供业务服务,所述DN可以是PDN网络,如因特网(Internet)、IP多媒体业务(IP Multi-media Service,IMS)网络、某些应用专用的数据网络等。The DN provides service services for the terminal device through data transmission with the terminal device, and the DN may be a PDN network, such as the Internet, IP Multi-media Service (IMS) network , Some application-specific data networks, etc.
在本申请实施例中,为了保证终端设备的业务传输的连续性和效率。在实际网络部署时,通信系统可以对一些位置移动较少或固定的通信设备进行双重部署,其中一个作为主通信设备,另外一个作为备通信设备。如图1中的终端设备a、终端设备c,以及各个中继设备。在业务传输过程中,通信系统中的网络设备、各个通信设备、核心网设备可以根据不同的业务需求或配置需求,或者根据无线连接中的某节点处主通信设备的运行情况,进行主备通信设备的状态变更或配置。In the embodiment of the present application, in order to ensure the continuity and efficiency of service transmission of the terminal device. In actual network deployment, the communication system can double-deploy some communication devices with relatively small or fixed locations, one of which is used as the main communication device and the other as the backup communication device. As shown in Figure 1, terminal equipment a, terminal equipment c, and each relay device. In the process of service transmission, the network equipment, various communication equipment, and core network equipment in the communication system can perform active and standby communication according to different service requirements or configuration requirements, or according to the operation of the main communication equipment at a node in the wireless connection The status change or configuration of the device.
此外,还需要说明的是,主备通信设备之间可以通过物理连接(例如网线、串口线等)或者无线连接,进行通信交互。这样,备通信设备可以对主通信设备的运行状态进行监测,以便在主通信设备的运行状态异常时,快速地进行主备切换。可选的,所述备通信设备可以通过心跳机制监测主通信设备的运行状态。In addition, it should be noted that the communication interaction between the main and standby communication devices may be through physical connections (such as network cables, serial cables, etc.) or wireless connections. In this way, the standby communication device can monitor the operating state of the main communication device, so as to quickly switch between the main communication device and the standby communication device when the operating state of the main communication device is abnormal. Optionally, the standby communication device may monitor the operating state of the main communication device through a heartbeat mechanism.
另外,所述主通信设备还可以将进行业务传输时使用的通信配置信息备份到所述备通信设备,这样,当发生主备切换时,所述备通信设备可以通过保存的通信配置信息进行配置,可以减小通过网络设备或上层中继设备传输通信配置信息造成的时延,快速地恢复无线连接。In addition, the main communication device can also back up the communication configuration information used during service transmission to the backup communication device. In this way, when a master/backup switch occurs, the backup communication device can be configured through the saved communication configuration information. , Can reduce the time delay caused by the transmission of communication configuration information through the network equipment or upper relay equipment, and quickly restore the wireless connection.
还需要指出的是,如图1所示的通信系统作为一个示例,并不对本申请实施例提供的方法适用的通信系统构成限定。本申请实施例还可以应用于各种类型和制式的通信系统,例如:第五代(The 5 th Generation,5G)通信系统、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)通信系统、车到万物(vehicle to everything,V2X)、长期演进-车联网(LTE-vehicle,LTE-V)、车到车(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)、车联网、机器类通信(Machine Type Communications,MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IoT)、长期演进-机器到机器(LTE-machine to machine,LTE-M)、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)、物联网、企业LTE离散窄带聚合(enterprise LTE discrete spectrum aggregation,eLTE-DSA)系统等,本申请实施例不予限定。 It should also be pointed out that the communication system shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example, and does not constitute a limitation on the communication system to which the method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applicable. Embodiments of the present application may also be applied to various types of communication systems and formats, for example: the fifth generation (The 5 th Generation, 5G) communication system, a long term evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) communication system, all the vehicles (vehicle to everything, V2X), long-term evolution-Internet of Vehicles (LTE-vehicle, LTE-V), Vehicle to Vehicle (V2V), Internet of Vehicles, Machine Type Communications (MTC), Internet of Things (Internet of Things) of things (IoT), long-term evolution-machine to machine (LTE-machine to machine, LTE-M), machine to machine (M2M), Internet of Things, enterprise LTE discrete spectrum aggregation (enterprise LTE discrete spectrum aggregation, eLTE-DSA) system, etc., which are not limited in the embodiment of this application.
为了实现如图1所示的通信系统中的主通信设备和/或备通信设备的状态切换,以保证该通信系统中业务传输的效率,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法。在该方法中,主要包括以下几个流程:通信设备接入网络流程、通信设备的状态初始化流程和通信设备的状态 变更流程。下面以部署在同一位置的两个通信设备——第一通信设备和第二通信设备为例进行说明。另外,为了便于描述,将所述第一通信设备和/或所述第二通信设备的父节点称为第三通信设备。In order to realize the state switching of the main communication device and/or the standby communication device in the communication system as shown in FIG. 1 to ensure the efficiency of service transmission in the communication system, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. In this method, it mainly includes the following processes: the communication equipment access network process, the state initialization process of the communication equipment, and the state change process of the communication equipment. The following takes two communication devices deployed in the same location—the first communication device and the second communication device—as an example for description. In addition, for ease of description, the parent node of the first communication device and/or the second communication device is referred to as a third communication device.
下面先对通信设备接入网络流程进行描述。The following first describes the process of connecting the communication device to the network.
为了保证第一通信设备和第二通信设备能够实现状态切换,保证无线连接能够成功建立,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备需要接入同一个小区。In order to ensure that the first communication device and the second communication device can implement state switching and ensure that a wireless connection can be successfully established, the first communication device and the second communication device need to access the same cell.
可选的,当所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过第三通信设备与所述网络设备建立连接时,所述小区是所述第三通信设备管理的小区;当所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接与所述网络设备建立连接时,所述小区是所述网络设备管理的小区。Optionally, when the first communication device and the second communication device establish a connection with the network device through a third communication device, the cell is a cell managed by the third communication device; when the first communication device When a communication device and the second communication device directly establish a connection with the network device, the cell is a cell managed by the network device.
可选的,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备可以但不限于通过以下实现方式接入同一个小区。Optionally, the first communication device and the second communication device may, but are not limited to, access the same cell through the following implementation manners.
实现方式一:Implementation method one:
所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间具有通信连接,能够进行通信交互。所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备中其中一个通信设备在成功接入小区后,将该小区的小区信息通过该通信连接发送给另一个通信设备;另一个通信设备通过该小区信息接入该小区。There is a communication connection between the first communication device and the second communication device, and communication interaction can be performed. After one of the first communication device and the second communication device successfully accesses the cell, the cell information of the cell is sent to the other communication device through the communication connection; the other communication device uses the cell information Access the cell.
实现方式二:Implementation method two:
在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备中分别设置能够接入的小区的小区信息,且在两个通信设备中设置的小区信息相同。这样,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备能够接入同一个小区。The cell information of accessible cells is set in the first communication device and the second communication device, respectively, and the cell information set in the two communication devices is the same. In this way, the first communication device and the second communication device can access the same cell.
实现方式三:Implementation method three:
网络设备或所述第三通信设备广播的系统消息中,增加用于主备通信设备接入的小区信息;所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备可以根据系统消息,接入同一个小区。In the system message broadcast by the network device or the third communication device, the cell information used for the access of the main and standby communication devices is added; the first communication device and the second communication device can access the same one according to the system message Community.
可选的,在以上各个实现方式中,所述小区信息可以包括:小区标识、小区使用的频点信息,以及管理小区的通信设备的标识等。Optionally, in each of the foregoing implementation manners, the cell information may include: cell identification, frequency point information used by the cell, and identification of a communication device that manages the cell, and so on.
可选的,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备可以通过随机接入的方式接入网络设备或第三通信设备,并与网络设备建立无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接。Optionally, the first communication device and the second communication device may access the network device or the third communication device by random access, and establish a radio resource control (RRC) connection with the network device .
示例性的,本申请实施例提供以下示例对通信设备接入网络流程进行具体描述。Exemplarily, the embodiments of the present application provide the following examples to specifically describe the process of a communication device accessing a network.
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备采用以上实现方式一接入第三通信设备管理的同一个小区的情况下,通信设备接入网络流程参阅图2所示,具体包括以下步骤:Example 1: In the case that the first communication device and the second communication device use the above implementation mode 1 to access the same cell managed by the third communication device, refer to Figure 2 for the communication device access network flow. It includes the following steps:
S201:所述第一通信设备通过随机接入流程接入第三通信设备。S201: The first communication device accesses the third communication device through a random access procedure.
在执行该随机接入流程之前,所述第一通信设备通过搜网过程中搜索到所述第三通信设备管理的小区。然后所述第一通信设备接收所述第三通信设备广播的系统消息,得该系统消息中包含的该小区的随机接入配置信息,从而通过该小区的随机接入配置信息,实现该随机接入流程。Before performing the random access procedure, the first communication device searches for a cell managed by the third communication device in a network search process. Then the first communication device receives the system message broadcast by the third communication device, and obtains the random access configuration information of the cell contained in the system message, so as to realize the random access configuration information through the random access configuration information of the cell. Into the process.
S202:所述第一通信设备向所述第三通信设备发送第一RRC连接请求(RRC connection request),请求建立RRC连接。S202: The first communication device sends a first RRC connection request (RRC connection request) to the third communication device to request the establishment of an RRC connection.
S203:所述第三通信设备向所述网络设备发送第二RRC连接请求,为所述第一通信设备请求建立RRC连接。S203: The third communication device sends a second RRC connection request to the network device to request the first communication device to establish an RRC connection.
可选的,当所述第三通信设备通过其他通信设备接入网络设备,在执行S203时,所述第三通信设备通过其他通信设备转发的方式,向所述网络设备发送所述第二RRC连接请求。Optionally, when the third communication device accesses the network device through another communication device, when S203 is performed, the third communication device sends the second RRC to the network device by means of forwarding by the other communication device Connection request.
S204:所述网络设备在接收到所述第二RRC连接请求后,向所述第三通信设备发送第一RRC连接设置(RRC connection setup)。S204: After receiving the second RRC connection request, the network device sends a first RRC connection setup (RRC connection setup) to the third communication device.
可选的,当所述第三通信设备通过其他通信设备接入网络设备,在执行S204时,所述网络设备也需要通过其他通信设备转发的方式,向所述第三通信设备发送所述第一RRC连接设置。Optionally, when the third communication device accesses the network device through another communication device, when S204 is performed, the network device also needs to send the first communication device to the third communication device by means of forwarding by other communication devices. An RRC connection setup.
S205:所述第三通信设备在接收到所述第一RRC连接设置后,向所述第一通信设备发送所述第二RRC连接设置。S205: After receiving the first RRC connection setting, the third communication device sends the second RRC connection setting to the first communication device.
S206:所述第一通信设备在接收到所述第二RRC连接设置后,向所述网络设备发送RRC连接设置完成(RRC connection setup complete)。S206: After receiving the second RRC connection setup, the first communication device sends an RRC connection setup complete (RRC connection setup complete) to the network device.
通过以上步骤S201-S206,所述第一通信设备成功与所述网络设备建立RRC连接,能够与所述网络设备之间进行数据传输。Through the above steps S201-S206, the first communication device successfully establishes an RRC connection with the network device, and can perform data transmission with the network device.
可选的,S202可以在所述第一通信设备执行S201的过程中执行,例如,所述第一通信设备在发送计划传输(scheduled transmission)消息(又称为消息3(message3,msg3))时,发送所述RRC连接请求。Optionally, S202 may be performed during the process of performing S201 by the first communication device. For example, when the first communication device sends a scheduled transmission (scheduled transmission) message (also called message 3 (message 3, msg3)) , Sending the RRC connection request.
S207:所述第一通信设备通过所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间具有通信连接,将其接入的小区的小区信息发送给所述第二通信设备。S207: The first communication device sends the cell information of the cell accessed by the first communication device to the second communication device through a communication connection between the first communication device and the second communication device.
S208:所述第二通信设备根据接收的所述小区信息,选择接入所述第三通信设备。S208: The second communication device selects to access the third communication device according to the received cell information.
同样的,所述第二通信设备通过S209-S214,成功与所述网络设备建立RRC连接,具体描述过程可以参见以上对S201-S206描述,此处不再赘述。Similarly, the second communication device successfully establishes an RRC connection with the network device through S209-S214. For the specific description process, please refer to the above description of S201-S206, which will not be repeated here.
还需要说明的是,当所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备是中继设备时,状态为主通信设备的所述第一通信设备或所述第二通信设备在成功与所述网络设备建立RRC连接后,可以广播同步信号/系统消息,以使其他通信设备或终端设备接入所述第一通信设备。It should also be noted that when the first communication device and the second communication device are relay devices, the first communication device or the second communication device whose status is the master communication device is successfully communicating with the After the network device establishes an RRC connection, it may broadcast a synchronization signal/system message, so that other communication devices or terminal devices can access the first communication device.
示例2,当所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接接入所述网络设备时,具体流程也可以参见图2。不同的是,第一通信设备和第二通信设备通过随机接入流程,接入网络设备;所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备分别与所述网络设备建立RRC连接的过程中,不需要通过第三通信设备进行信息转发。Example 2: When the first communication device and the second communication device directly access the network device, the specific process can also refer to FIG. 2. The difference is that the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through a random access process; in the process of establishing an RRC connection between the first communication device and the second communication device and the network device, There is no need to forward information through a third communication device.
为了保证通信设备和网络设备之间的无线链路的有效性,部署在同一位置的两个通信设备、网络设备均需要确定两个通信设备的状态,以便所述网络设备根据第一通信设备和第二通信设备的状态,对两个通信设备进行无线接口配置。In order to ensure the effectiveness of the wireless link between the communication device and the network device, two communication devices and network devices deployed in the same location need to determine the status of the two communication devices so that the network device can determine the status of the two communication devices according to the first communication device and the network device. The status of the second communication device, and the wireless interface configuration of the two communication devices.
因此,无论是在通信设备的状态初始化流程中,还是在通信设备的状态变更流程中,每个通信设备的状态在通信设备侧和网络设备均需要同步保存。Therefore, no matter in the state initialization process of the communication device or the state change process of the communication device, the state of each communication device needs to be saved synchronously on the communication device side and the network device.
可选的,当所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过第三通信设备与所述网络设备建立连接时,所述第三通信设备也可以同步保存这两个通信设备的状态。Optionally, when the first communication device and the second communication device establish a connection with the network device through the third communication device, the third communication device may also synchronously save the states of the two communication devices.
下面对通信设备的状态初始化流程进行描述。The following describes the state initialization process of the communication device.
在本申请实施例中,图1所示的通信系统可以但不限于采用以下实现方式对第一通信设备和第二通信设备的状态进行初始化。其中,为了便于描述,在以下各实现方式中,以所述第一通信设备初始化的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备初始化的状态为备通信设备为例进行说明。In the embodiment of the present application, the communication system shown in FIG. 1 may, but is not limited to, adopt the following implementation manners to initialize the states of the first communication device and the second communication device. For ease of description, in the following implementation manners, the state initialized by the first communication device is the main communication device, and the state initialized by the second communication device is the standby communication device as an example for description.
实现方式一:第一通信设备和/或第二通信设备向网络设备上报状态信息。Implementation manner 1: The first communication device and/or the second communication device report status information to the network device.
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过接入第三通信设备与网络设备建立无线连接的情况下。参阅图3所示,通信设备的状态初始化流程具体包括:Example 1: When the first communication device and the second communication device establish a wireless connection with the network device by accessing the third communication device. Referring to Figure 3, the state initialization process of the communication device specifically includes:
S301:所述第一通信设备在接入所述第三通信设备后,向所述第三通信设备发送第一状态信息,所述第一状态信息用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备。S301: After accessing the third communication device, the first communication device sends first status information to the third communication device, where the first status information is used to notify: the status of the first communication device Main communication equipment.
可选的,所述第一通信设备可以通过以下方式向所述第三通信设备发送所述第一状态信息:Optionally, the first communication device may send the first status information to the third communication device in the following manner:
方式一:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一通信设备的标识,其中,所述第一通信设备的标识中包含指示字段,所述指示字段用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备。Manner 1: The first communication device sends the identification of the first communication device to the network device, where the identification of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate the first communication device. The state of the communication device is the main communication device.
可选的,在本申请实施例中,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的标识可以是预先设置并存储在模组中的,或者是应用层配置的。例如,该标识可以是国际移动设备识别码(international mobile equipment identity,IMEI),或者接入回传一体化节点识别码(IAB node identity),或者其他可以唯一标识通信设备的固定标识。Optionally, in this embodiment of the present application, the identifiers of the first communication device and the second communication device may be preset and stored in a module, or may be configured at the application layer. For example, the identifier may be an international mobile equipment identity (IMEI), or an access backhaul integrated node identity (IAB node identity), or other fixed identifiers that can uniquely identify a communication device.
可选的,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的标识还可以是预先设置并存储在客户识别模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)中的,或者嵌入式客户识别模块(embedded subscriber identity module,eSIM)中的。例如,该标识可以是国际移动用户识别码(international mobile subscriber identification number,IMSI),或者接入回传一体化节点识别码,或者其他可以唯一标识通信设备的用户的固定标识。Optionally, the identities of the first communication device and the second communication device may also be preset and stored in a subscriber identity module (SIM), or an embedded subscriber identity module (SIM) module, eSIM). For example, the identifier may be an international mobile subscriber identification number (IMSI), or an integrated node identification code for access and backhaul, or other fixed identifiers that can uniquely identify the user of the communication device.
可选的,双重部署的两个通信设备的标识之间符合设定规则。可选的,所述设定规则可以是协议规定的,或者通信系统中各个通信设备之间协商的。Optionally, the identities of the two dual-deployed communication devices comply with the set rules. Optionally, the setting rule may be stipulated by a protocol or negotiated between various communication devices in the communication system.
例如,所述第一通信设备的标识和所述第二通信设备的标识中设定字段(如高N位)相同,指示字段(如低M位)不同。其中,M、N为正整数且是固定值。当然,初始状态为主通信设备的不同通信设备的标识中包含的指示字段一般相同,初始状态为备通信设备的不同通信设备的标识中的包含的指示字段也相同。For example, the set field (such as high N bits) in the identifier of the first communication device and the identifier of the second communication device are the same, and the indication field (such as low M bits) is different. Among them, M and N are positive integers and fixed values. Of course, the indication fields contained in the identifiers of different communication devices of the primary communication device in the initial state are generally the same, and the indication fields contained in the identifiers of the different communication devices of the standby communication device in the initial state are also the same.
举例说明,通信设备1的标识为AAA111,通信设备2的标识为AAA000,通信设备3的标识为BBB111,通信设备4的标识为BBB000。通过各个通信设备的标识可知,通信设备1和通信设备3为主通信设备,通信设备2和通信设备4为备通信设备,且通信设备1和通信设备2对应,通信设备3和通信设备4对应。For example, the identification of communication device 1 is AAA111, the identification of communication device 2 is AAA000, the identification of communication device 3 is BBB111, and the identification of communication device 4 is BBB000. From the identification of each communication device, it can be seen that communication device 1 and communication device 3 are main communication devices, communication device 2 and communication device 4 are standby communication devices, and communication device 1 corresponds to communication device 2, and communication device 3 corresponds to communication device 4 .
又例如,代表所述第一通信设备的标识的数字和代表所述第二通信设备的标识的数字之间满足特定的数学关系。For another example, the number representing the identification of the first communication device and the number representing the identification of the second communication device satisfy a specific mathematical relationship.
总之,通信系统中的任一个设备可以根据其中一个通信设备的标识和该设定规则,确定与其对应的主备通信设备的标识。In short, any device in the communication system can determine the identity of the corresponding main and standby communication device according to the identity of one of the communication devices and the setting rule.
方式二:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送第二通信设备的指示信息,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备。Manner 2: The first communication device sends instruction information of the second communication device to the network device, where the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the first communication device 2. Communication equipment.
通过该方式,网络设备可以通过该第二通信设备的指示信息,即可了解所述第一通信设备的状态,以及所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备。In this way, the network device can learn the status of the first communication device through the indication information of the second communication device, and the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
方式三:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备。Manner 3: The first communication device sends a status indication to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device.
可选的,所述状态指示可以是主通信设备状态指示,即只有初始状态为主通信设备的通信设备可以发送所述状态指示。Optionally, the status indication may be a master communication device status indication, that is, only a communication device whose initial state is the master communication device can send the status indication.
可选的,所述状态指示可以通过取值不同,指示不同的状态。例如,当所述状态指示取值为1时,该状态指示用于指示状态为主通信设备,当所述状态指示取值为0时,该状态指示用于指示状态为备通信设备。Optionally, the state indication may indicate different states by taking different values. For example, when the status indication value is 1, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the master communication device, and when the status indication value is 0, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the standby communication device.
需要说明的是,在方式三中,所述网络设备可以通过各种传统的技术,确定所述状态指示是所述第一通信设备发送的。例如,所述状态指示中包含所述第一通信设备的指示信息。It should be noted that, in the third manner, the network device may determine that the status indication is sent by the first communication device through various conventional technologies. For example, the status indication includes indication information of the first communication device.
方式四:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一通信设备的标识和状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示状态为主通信设备,所述第一通信设备的标识用于通知:所述状态指示所指示的状态是第一通信设备的状态。Manner 4: The first communication device sends the identification and status indication of the first communication device to the network device, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the master communication device, and the identification of the first communication device is used to Notification: The state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device.
方式五:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备。Manner 5: The first communication device sends a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the second communication device The indication information of the communication device is used to indicate that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
在以上方式中,任一个通信设备(所述第一通信设备或所述第二通信设备的)的指示信息为以下任一项:该通信设备的标识、该通信设备的网络标识、该通信设备的用户标识、该通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码。In the above manner, the indication information of any communication device (of the first communication device or the second communication device) is any one of the following: the identification of the communication device, the network identification of the communication device, and the communication device The user identification of the communication device and the integrated node identification code of the communication device.
可选的,通信设备的网络标识为该通信设备接入网络时,由网络分配的临时标识,例如,小区无线网络临时标识(cell-radio network temporary identifier,C-RNTI)。Optionally, the network identifier of the communication device is a temporary identifier allocated by the network when the communication device accesses the network, for example, a cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI).
可选的,通信设备的标识为接入回传一体化节点识别码,IMEI或者其他可以唯一标识通信设备的固定标识。Optionally, the identification of the communication device is an access backhaul integrated node identification code, IMEI or other fixed identification that can uniquely identify the communication device.
可选的,通信设备的用户标识为接入回传一体化节点识别码,IMSI或者其他可以唯一标识通信设备的固定标识。Optionally, the user identifier of the communication device is an access backhaul integrated node identification code, IMSI or other fixed identifier that can uniquely identify the communication device.
S302:所述第三通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一状态信息。S302: The third communication device sends the first state information to the network device.
S303:所述网络设备若确定本地未保存所述第一通信设备的状态,则根据所述第一状态信息确定所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备。S303: If the network device determines that the state of the first communication device is not stored locally, it determines that the state of the first communication device is the master communication device according to the first state information.
S304:所述第二通信设备在接入所述第三通信设备后,向所述第三通信设备发送第二状态信息,所述第二状态信息用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。S304: After accessing the third communication device, the second communication device sends second status information to the third communication device, where the second status information is used to notify: the status of the second communication device For the preparation of communication equipment.
可选的,与所述第一通信设备发送所述第一状态信息类似的,所述第二通信设备也可以采用五种方式,向所述第三通信设备发送所述第二状态信息。Optionally, similar to the first communication device sending the first status information, the second communication device may also use five methods to send the second status information to the third communication device.
方式一:所述第二通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第二通信设备的标识,其中,所述第二通信设备的标识中包含指示字段,所述指示字段用于指示所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。Manner 1: The second communication device sends the identification of the second communication device to the network device, where the identification of the second communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate the second communication device. The status of the communication device is standby communication device.
方式二:所述第二通信设备向所述网络设备发送第一通信设备的指示信息,所述第一通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第二通信设备对应的主通信设备为所述第一通信设备。Manner 2: The second communication device sends instruction information of the first communication device to the network device, where the instruction information of the first communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device One communication equipment.
方式三:所述第二通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所 述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。Manner 3: The second communication device sends a status indication to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the second communication device is a standby communication device.
可选的,所述状态指示可以是备通信设备状态指示,即只有初始状态为备通信设备的通信设备可以发送所述状态指示。Optionally, the status indication may be a standby communication device status indication, that is, only a communication device whose initial state is the standby communication device can send the status indication.
可选的,所述状态指示可以通过取值不同,指示不同的状态。Optionally, the state indication may indicate different states by taking different values.
需要说明的是,在方式三中,所述网络设备可以通过各种传统的技术,确定所述状态指示是所述第二通信设备发送的。例如,所述状态指示中包含所述第二通信设备的指示信息。It should be noted that in the third manner, the network device may determine that the status indication is sent by the second communication device through various conventional technologies. For example, the status indication includes indication information of the second communication device.
方式四:所述第二通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第二通信设备的标识和状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示状态为备通信设备,所述第二通信设备的标识用于通知:所述状态指示所指示的状态是第二通信设备的状态。Manner 4: The second communication device sends the identification and status indication of the second communication device to the network device, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is a standby communication device, and the identification of the second communication device is used for Notification: The state indicated by the state indication is the state of the second communication device.
方式五:所述第二通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态指示和第一通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备,所述第一通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第二通信设备对应的主通信设备为所述第一通信设备。Manner 5: The second communication device sends a status indication and indication information of the first communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the second communication device is a standby communication device, and the first communication device The instruction information of the communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device.
S305:所述第三通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第二状态信息。S305: The third communication device sends the second status information to the network device.
S306:所述网络设备若确定本地未保存所述第二通信设备的状态,则根据所述第二状态信息确定所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。S306: If the network device determines that the state of the second communication device is not stored locally, it determines that the state of the second communication device is a standby communication device according to the second state information.
可选的,所述网络设备中维护有通信设备状态配置信息,该通信设备状态配置信息中包含多个通信设备的状态,所述网络设备可以从所述通信设备状态配置信息中检索所述第一通信设备和/或所述第二通信设备,从而确定是否保存所述第一通信设备和/或所述第二通信设备的状态。Optionally, the communication device state configuration information is maintained in the network device, and the communication device state configuration information includes the states of multiple communication devices, and the network device may retrieve the first communication device state configuration information from the communication device state configuration information. A communication device and/or the second communication device, thereby determining whether to save the state of the first communication device and/or the second communication device.
可选的,所述第三通信设备可以通过S307a和S307b,或者S308,确定所述第一通信设备和/或所述第二通信设备的状态。Optionally, the third communication device may determine the status of the first communication device and/or the second communication device through S307a and S307b, or S308.
S307a:所述第三通信设备在接收到所述第一状态信息后,若确定本地未保存所述第一通信设备的状态,则根据所述第一状态信息确定所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备。S307a: After the third communication device receives the first state information, if it is determined that the state of the first communication device is not saved locally, determine the state of the first communication device according to the first state information Main communication equipment.
S307b:所述第三通信设备在接收到所述第一状态信息后,若确定本地未保存所述第二通信设备的状态,则根据所述第二状态信息确定所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。S307b: After the third communication device receives the first state information, if it is determined that the state of the second communication device is not saved locally, determine the state of the second communication device according to the second state information For the preparation of communication equipment.
S308:所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送所述第一状态信息/所述第二状态信息;或者,所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息。所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。S308: The network device sends the first status information/the second status information to the third communication device; or, the network device sends communication device status configuration information to the third communication device. In the communication device state configuration information, the state of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the state of the second communication device is the standby communication device.
示例2:当所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接连接所述网络设备时,通信设备的状态初始化流程具体流程也可以参见图3。不同的是,第一通信设备和第二通信设备直接将状态信息发送给所述网络设备。Example 2: When the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device, the specific flow of the state initialization process of the communication device can also be seen in FIG. 3. The difference is that the first communication device and the second communication device directly send the status information to the network device.
示例3:当所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过接入第三通信设备与网络设备建立无线连接时,参阅图4所示,通信设备的状态初始化流程具体流程包括:Example 3: When the first communication device and the second communication device establish a wireless connection with the network device by accessing the third communication device, referring to FIG. 4, the specific process of the state initialization process of the communication device includes:
S401:所述第一通信设备在接入所述第三通信设备后,通过所述第三通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态信息,所述状态信息用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备。S401: After the first communication device accesses the third communication device, it sends status information to the network device through the third communication device, where the status information is used to notify: The status is the main communication device.
S402:所述网络设备若确定本地未保存所述第一通信设备的状态,则根据所述状态信息确定所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,并根据预设的主备通信设备对应关系,确定所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为第二通信设备。S402: If the network device determines that the state of the first communication device is not saved locally, it determines that the state of the first communication device is the master communication device according to the state information, and corresponds to the preset master and backup communication device Relationship, determining that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device.
可选的,所述主备通信设备对应关系为:所述第一通信设备的标识与所述第二通信设备的标识之间符合的设定规则。该设定规则可以是协议规定的,或者通信系统中各个通信设备之间协商的。所述状态信息中包含所述第一通信设备的标识,这样,所述网络设备可以根据所述第一通信设备的标识,确定第二通信设备的标识,从而确定所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为第二通信设备。Optionally, the corresponding relationship between the active and standby communication devices is: a set rule that conforms to the identity of the first communication device and the identity of the second communication device. The setting rule may be stipulated by an agreement or negotiated between various communication devices in the communication system. The status information includes the identity of the first communication device, so that the network device can determine the identity of the second communication device according to the identity of the first communication device, thereby determining the identity of the first communication device The standby communication device is the second communication device.
例如,该设定规则为主通信设备的标识和备通信设备的标识中前3位相同,后1位不同,且标识后1位取值为0的通信设备的状态为备通信设备,标识后1位取值为1的通信设备的状态为主通信设备。当所述第一通信设备的标识为XXX1时,所述网络设备可以确定所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备的标识为XXX0。For example, in this setting rule, the first 3 digits of the identification of the primary communication device and the identification of the standby communication device are the same, the last 1 digit is different, and the status of the communication device whose 1 digit value is 0 after the identification is the standby communication device. The status of a communication device with a value of 1 is the master communication device. When the identifier of the first communication device is XXX1, the network device may determine that the identifier of the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is XXX0.
可选的,所述主备通信设备对应关系为所述网络设备存储的,或者从核心网设备接收的。所述主备通信设备对应关系中包含所述第一通信设备的指示信息和所述第二通信设备的指示信息,例如表1或表2所示。其中,任一个通信设备的指示信息可以为该通信设备的标识、该通信设备的网络标识、该通信设备的用户标识等。Optionally, the corresponding relationship between the active and standby communication devices is stored by the network device or received from a core network device. The corresponding relationship between the main and standby communication devices includes the indication information of the first communication device and the indication information of the second communication device, for example, as shown in Table 1 or Table 2. Wherein, the indication information of any communication device may be the identification of the communication device, the network identification of the communication device, the user identification of the communication device, and so on.
表1Table 1
主备通信设备对应关系标识Correspondence identification of main and standby communication equipment 通信设备的指示信息Instructions for communication equipment 通信设备的指示信息Instructions for communication equipment
00 第一通信设备的指示信息Instruction information of the first communication device 第二通信设备的指示信息Instruction information of the second communication device
11 ……... ……...
表2Table 2
主备通信设备对应关系标识Correspondence identification of main and standby communication equipment 通信设备的指示信息Instructions for communication equipment
00 第一通信设备的指示信息Instruction information of the first communication device
00 第二通信设备的指示信息Instruction information of the second communication device
……... ……...
S403:所述网络设备通过所述第三通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。S403: The network device sends a status indication to the second communication device through the third communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the second communication device is a standby communication device.
示例4,同示例3相同,也是当所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过接入第三通信设备与网络设备建立无线连接时执行的。与示例3流程类似,不同的是由第二通信设备上报自身状态。参阅图5所示,具体流程包括:Example 4, which is the same as Example 3, is also executed when the first communication device and the second communication device establish a wireless connection with the network device by accessing the third communication device. The process is similar to Example 3, except that the second communication device reports its own state. Refer to Figure 5, the specific process includes:
S501:所述第二通信设备在接入所述第三通信设备后,通过所述第三通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态信息,所述状态信息用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。S501: After the second communication device accesses the third communication device, it sends status information to the network device through the third communication device, where the status information is used to notify: The status is standby communication equipment.
S502:所述网络设备若确定本地未保存所述第二通信设备的状态,则根据所述状态信息确定所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备,并根据预设的主备通信设备对应关系,确定所述第二通信设备对应的主通信设备为第一通信设备。S502: If the network device determines that the state of the second communication device is not saved locally, it determines that the state of the second communication device is a standby communication device according to the state information, and corresponds to a preset master and standby communication device Relationship, determining that the primary communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device.
所述主备通信设备的对应关系可以参见示例3中的具体描述,此处不再赘述。For the corresponding relationship between the main and standby communication devices, please refer to the specific description in Example 3, which will not be repeated here.
S503:所述网络设备通过所述第三通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备。S503: The network device sends a status indication to the first communication device through the third communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device.
示例5和示例6均为所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接连接所述网络设备的情况下执行的,分别参阅图6和图7所示。与参见图4和图5不同的是,第一通信设备、第二通信设备与所述网络设备之间消息交互无需通过第三通信设备转发,因此具体过程可 以参见以上对图5和图6所示的示例的描述,此处不再赘述。Examples 5 and 6 are both executed when the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device, and refer to FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 respectively. 4 and 5, the message interaction between the first communication device, the second communication device, and the network device does not need to be forwarded through the third communication device, so the specific process can be referred to the above description of FIGS. 5 and 6 The description of the illustrated example will not be repeated here.
实现方式二:第一通信设备向网络设备发送请求信息,用于请求成为主通信设备。Implementation manner 2: The first communication device sends request information to the network device for requesting to become the master communication device.
示例1:在所述第一通信设备直接连接所述网络设备的情况下,参阅图8所示。在本示例中,以所述第一通信设备为具有IAB能力的通信设备为例进行描述。所述第一通信设备请求成为主通信设备的流程具体包括:Example 1: In the case where the first communication device is directly connected to the network device, refer to FIG. 8. In this example, description is made by taking the first communication device as a communication device with IAB capability as an example. The process of the first communication device requesting to become the master communication device specifically includes:
S801:所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求开启或者激活IAB。S801: The first communication device sends request information to the network device, where the request information is used to request to turn on or activate the IAB.
可选的,所述请求信息包含第一通信设备的IAB节点识别码。Optionally, the request information includes the IAB node identification code of the first communication device.
可选的,所述请求信息包含第二通信设备的IAB节点识别码和/或C-RNTI。可选的,所述第二通信设备与所述第一通信设备具有配对关系或者具有关联关系或者成对关系或者存在主备通信设备对应关系或者属于同一个设备组。Optionally, the request information includes the IAB node identification code and/or C-RNTI of the second communication device. Optionally, the second communication device and the first communication device have a pairing relationship or an association relationship or a pairing relationship or a corresponding relationship between a master and a backup communication device or belong to the same device group.
可选的,所述请求信息为接入回传一体化连接请求(IAB connection request)消息或者接入回传一体化激活请求(IAB activation request)消息或者接入回传一体化开启请求(IAB enable request)或者接入回传一体化准许请求(IAB permission request)。Optionally, the request information is an access backhaul integrated connection request (IAB connection request) message or an access backhaul integrated activation request (IAB activation request) message or an access backhaul integrated activation request (IAB enable) message. request) or access backhaul integrated permission request (IAB permission request).
可选的,在S801之前或者在S801之后,所述网络设备可以向所述第一通信设备发送查询指示,所述查询指示用于指示所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送配对状态信息。所述第一通信设备收到所述查询指示后,向所述网络设备发送配对状态信息。Optionally, before S801 or after S801, the network device may send a query instruction to the first communication device, where the query instruction is used to instruct the first communication device to send pairing status information to the network device . After receiving the query instruction, the first communication device sends pairing status information to the network device.
可选的,所述配对状态信息包含以下的一项或多项:与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的标识、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的IAB节点识别码、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的C-RNTI、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的状态指示。其中,所述状态指示用于指示与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的状态为备通信设备或主通信设备。Optionally, the pairing status information includes one or more of the following: an identifier of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, an IAB node of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device An identification code, a C-RNTI of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and a status indication of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device. Wherein, the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
S802a:若所述第一通信设备收到所述网络设备发送的配置信息,所述第一通信设备开启或激活IAB。S802a: If the first communication device receives the configuration information sent by the network device, the first communication device turns on or activates the IAB.
其中,所述配置信息用于配置第一通信设备开启或激活IAB,或者用于配置/重配置所述第一通信设备的IAB参数。所述配置信息可以是接入回传一体化配置(IAB configuration)消息或者接入回传一体化连接配置(IAB connection configuration)消息或者接入回传一体化建立(IAB setup)消息或者接入回传一体化连接建立(IAB connection setup)消息。The configuration information is used to configure the first communication device to enable or activate IAB, or to configure/reconfigure the IAB parameters of the first communication device. The configuration information may be an access backhaul integrated configuration (IAB configuration) message or an access backhaul integrated connection configuration (IAB connection configuration) message or an access backhaul integrated setup (IAB setup) message or an access backhaul. Transmission of integrated connection setup (IAB connection setup) message.
在该情况下,所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备。可选的,所述网络设备在向所述第一通信设备发送所述配置信息后,还可以向所述第二通信设备发送状态指示,用于通知所述第二通信设备为备通信设备,以使所述第二通信设备不再发起成为主通信设备的流程。In this case, the state of the first communication device is the master communication device. Optionally, after the network device sends the configuration information to the first communication device, it may also send a status indication to the second communication device for notifying the second communication device to be a standby communication device, So that the second communication device no longer initiates the process of becoming the master communication device.
S802b:若所述第一通信设备收到所述网络设备发送的拒绝信息,所述第一通信设备不开启或不激活IAB。其中,所述拒绝信息用于拒绝所述第一通信设备开启或者激活IAB的请求。S802b: If the first communication device receives the rejection information sent by the network device, the first communication device does not turn on or does not activate the IAB. The rejection information is used to reject the request of the first communication device to turn on or activate the IAB.
可选的,所述第一通信设备接收到所述拒绝信息后可以再次发送请求信息请求成为主通信设备;或者所述第一通信设备接收到所述拒绝信息后确定自身状态为备通信设备,所述网络设备在向所述第一通信设备发送所述拒绝信息后,还向所述第二通信设备发送配置信息,指示所述第二通信设备成为主通信设备;或者所述第一通信设备通过与所述第二通 信设备的通信连接通知所述第二通信设备:所述第一通信设备请求成为主通信设备失败,以使所述第二通信设备通过以上流程请求成为主通信设备。Optionally, after receiving the rejection information, the first communication device may send a request information again to request to become the primary communication device; or the first communication device may determine its own status as a backup communication device after receiving the rejection information, After the network device sends the rejection information to the first communication device, it also sends configuration information to the second communication device to instruct the second communication device to become the master communication device; or the first communication device The second communication device is notified through the communication connection with the second communication device that the request of the first communication device to become the master communication device has failed, so that the second communication device requests to become the master communication device through the above process.
示例2:当所述第一通信设备通过接入第三通信设备与所述网络设备建立无线连接的情况下,所述第一通信设备请求成为主通信设备的流程也可以参见图8所示,不同的是,所述第一通信设备与所述网络设备之间的信息交互通过所述第三通信设备转发。Example 2: When the first communication device establishes a wireless connection with the network device by accessing the third communication device, the flow of the first communication device requesting to become the master communication device can also be referred to as shown in FIG. 8. The difference is that the information interaction between the first communication device and the network device is forwarded by the third communication device.
实现方式三:网络设备设置第一通信设备和第二通信设备的状态,并通知第一通信设备和第二通信设备各自的状态。在该实现方式中,所述网络设备中维护了通信设备状态配置信息,该通信设备状态配置信息中保存了第一通信设备的状态和/或所述第二通信设备的状态。Implementation manner 3: The network device sets the status of the first communication device and the second communication device, and notifies the respective status of the first communication device and the second communication device. In this implementation manner, the communication device state configuration information is maintained in the network device, and the communication device state configuration information stores the state of the first communication device and/or the state of the second communication device.
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备后,所述网络设备根据存储的通信设备状态配置信息,通过所述第三通信设备分别向所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备发送第一状态指示和第二状态指示。具体流程可以参阅图9所示。Example 1: After the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device, the network device passes through the third communication device according to the stored state configuration information of the communication device. The communication device sends a first status indication and a second status indication to the first communication device and the second communication device, respectively. The specific process can be referred to as shown in Figure 9.
所述第一状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二状态指示用于指示所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。The first status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a master communication device, and the second status indication is used to indicate that the status of the second communication device is a standby communication device.
示例2:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备后,所述网络设备通过所述第三通信设备分别向所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息。具体流程也可以参阅图9所示,不同的时,将图中的第一状态指示和第二状态指示换成通信设备状态配置信息。Example 2: After the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device, the network device respectively communicates with the first communication device through the third communication device The device and the second communication device send communication device state configuration information. The specific process can also be referred to as shown in FIG. 9. When different, replace the first status indication and the second status indication in the figure with the communication device status configuration information.
示例3:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备后,所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送第一状态指示或通信设备状态配置信息,所述第一状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备和/或所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。所述第三通信设备在接收到第一状态指示或通信设备状态配置信息之后,向所述第一通信设备发送第二状态指示,向所述第二通信设备发送第三状态指示。Example 3: After the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device, the network device sends a first status indication or communication to the third communication device Device status configuration information, where the first status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device and/or the status of the second communication device is the standby communication device. After receiving the first status indication or the communication device status configuration information, the third communication device sends a second status indication to the first communication device, and sends a third status indication to the second communication device.
其中,所述第二状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第三状态指示用于指示所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备。The second state indication is used to indicate that the state of the first communication device is a master communication device, and the third state indication is used to indicate that the state of the second communication device is a standby communication device.
示例4和示例5:均为所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接连接所述网络设备的情况下执行的,具体流程也可以参见图9。不同的是,第一通信设备、第二通信设备与所述网络设备之间消息交互无需通过第三通信设备转发。Example 4 and Example 5: Both are executed when the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device, and the specific process can also be referred to FIG. 9. The difference is that the message interaction between the first communication device, the second communication device, and the network device does not need to be forwarded through the third communication device.
需要说明的是,在以上各个示例中,当所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过接入第三通信设备与网络设备建立无线连接时,所述网络设备在将包含或指示第一通信设备和第二通信设备的状态的信息发送给所述第三通信设备时,所述第三通信设备保存第一通信设备和第二通信设备的状态。It should be noted that in each of the above examples, when the first communication device and the second communication device establish a wireless connection with the network device by accessing the third communication device, the network device will include or indicate When information about the states of a communication device and a second communication device is sent to the third communication device, the third communication device saves the states of the first communication device and the second communication device.
实现方式四:核心网设备设置第一通信设备和第二通信设备的状态,并通知网络设备第一通信设备和第二通信设备的状态。在该实现方式中,所述核心网设备中维护了通信设备状态配置信息,该通信设备状态配置信息中保存了第一通信设备的状态和/或所述第二通信设备的状态。在所述网络设备与所述核心网设备建立连接后,所述核心网设备向所述网络设备发送所述通信设备状态配置信息;然后,所述网络设备再通过上述实现方式三,通 知第一通信设备和第二通信设备各自的状态。实现方式四中的各个示例的流程可以参见实现方式三中的各个示例的流程,此处不再赘述。Implementation manner 4: The core network device sets the status of the first communication device and the second communication device, and notifies the network device of the status of the first communication device and the second communication device. In this implementation manner, the communication device state configuration information is maintained in the core network device, and the communication device state configuration information stores the state of the first communication device and/or the state of the second communication device. After the network device establishes a connection with the core network device, the core network device sends the communication device state configuration information to the network device; then, the network device then informs the first The respective status of the communication device and the second communication device. The flow of each example in the fourth implementation manner may refer to the flow of each example in the third implementation manner, which will not be repeated here.
可选的,所述核心网设备可以将所述通信设备状态配置信息携带在初始上下文请求(initial context setup Request)中。Optionally, the core network device may carry the communication device state configuration information in an initial context setup request (initial context setup Request).
可选的,在上述示例中,任一个通信设备(所述第一通信设备或所述第二通信设备)在与其他设备进行信息交互时,信息内包含其标识。此外,当信息中包含或指示某个通信设备的状态时,也包含该通信设备的标识。Optionally, in the above example, when any communication device (the first communication device or the second communication device) exchanges information with other devices, the information includes its identification. In addition, when the information contains or indicates the status of a certain communication device, it also contains the identification of the communication device.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,通信设备的状态初始化流程可以在通信设备接入网络流程之后再进行。可选的,通信设备的状态初始化流程中信息交互可以在RRC连接重建立、RRC连接恢复过程,或者RRC连接重配置过程中实现。例如,在以上各个实现方式中,第一通信设备或第二通信设备在向第三通信设备或网络设备发送状态信息时,或者第三通信设备向网络设备发送状态信息或通信设备状态配置信息时,可以将相应的信息携带在RRC连接重建立请求、RRC连接恢复请求,或者RRC连接重配置请求中。当然,以上实现方式中任两个设备在交互其他信息时,也可以将该信息携带在RRC连接重建立、RRC连接恢复过程,或者RRC连接重配置过程中该两个设备交互的信息中,具体此处不再赘述。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the state initialization process of the communication device may be performed after the communication device accesses the network process. Optionally, the information exchange in the state initialization process of the communication device may be implemented in the RRC connection re-establishment process, the RRC connection recovery process, or the RRC connection reconfiguration process. For example, in each of the above implementations, when the first communication device or the second communication device sends status information to the third communication device or network device, or when the third communication device sends status information or communication device status configuration information to the network device , The corresponding information can be carried in the RRC connection reestablishment request, the RRC connection recovery request, or the RRC connection reconfiguration request. Of course, when any two devices in the above implementations exchange other information, the information can also be carried in the RRC connection re-establishment, RRC connection recovery process, or the information exchanged between the two devices during the RRC connection reconfiguration process, specifically I won't repeat them here.
还需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,通信设备的状态初始化流程还可以在通信设备接入网络流程过程中进行。可选的,通信设备的状态初始化流程中信息交互可以在RRC连接建立过程中实现。例如,第一通信设备或第二通信设备在向第三通信设备或网络设备发送状态信息时,或者第三通信设备向网络设备发送状态信息或通信设备状态配置信息时,可以将相应的信息携带在RRC连接建立请求中。It should also be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the state initialization process of the communication device may also be performed during the process of the communication device accessing the network. Optionally, the information exchange in the state initialization procedure of the communication device may be implemented during the establishment of the RRC connection. For example, when the first communication device or the second communication device sends status information to the third communication device or network device, or when the third communication device sends status information or communication device status configuration information to the network device, the corresponding information may be carried In the RRC connection establishment request.
另外,可选的,在通信系统各设备中维护的通信设备状态配置信息可以如表3或表4所示:In addition, optionally, the communication device status configuration information maintained in each device of the communication system may be as shown in Table 3 or Table 4:
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2019081568-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2019081568-appb-000001
表4Table 4
Figure PCTCN2019081568-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2019081568-appb-000002
在通信设备的状态变更流程中,具体包括以下两个子流程:状态变更触发子流程和无 线接口的配置子流程。The state change process of a communication device specifically includes the following two sub-processes: the state change trigger sub-process and the wireless interface configuration sub-process.
下面对状态变更触发子流程进行描述。The following describes the state change trigger sub-process.
在本申请实施例中,状态变更触发的实现方式为:In the embodiment of this application, the implementation of the state change trigger is as follows:
实现方式一:由状态为主通信设备的所述第一通信设备触发;Implementation manner 1: Triggered by the first communication device whose status is the master communication device;
实现方式二:由状态为备通信设备的所述第二通信设备触发;Implementation manner 2: triggered by the second communication device in the standby communication device state;
实现方式三:由所述第一通信设备和/或所述第二通信设备的父节点——所述第三通信设备触发;Implementation manner 3: triggered by the third communication device, the parent node of the first communication device and/or the second communication device;
实现方式四:由所述网络设备触发;Implementation manner 4: triggered by the network device;
实现方式五:由核心网设备触发。Implementation mode 5: Triggered by core network equipment.
可选的,在实际应用中,通信系统可以采用以上任一种实现方式触发,或者通过任一种实现方式的组合触发,本申请对此不作限定。需要说明的是,当通信系统采用实现方式一触发时,通信系统还需要向即将变更为主通信设备的所述第二通信设备发送状态变更指示;当通信系统采用实现方式二触发时,通信系统可以向即将变更为主通信设备的所述第二通信设备发送状态变更指示,也可以不发送。当通信系统同时采用实现方式一和实现方式二触发时,通信系统无需向第一通信设备和第二通信设备发送状态变更指示。Optionally, in actual applications, the communication system can be triggered by any of the above implementations, or triggered by a combination of any of the implementations, which is not limited in this application. It should be noted that when the communication system is triggered by the realization method 1, the communication system also needs to send a state change instruction to the second communication device that is about to change to the primary communication device; when the communication system is triggered by the realization method 2, the communication system The state change instruction may be sent to the second communication device that is about to change to the main communication device, or not. When the communication system uses both implementation manner 1 and implementation manner 2 to be triggered at the same time, the communication system does not need to send state change instructions to the first communication device and the second communication device.
以下对通过示例对各个实现方式进行描述说明。The following describes each implementation manner through examples.
实现方式一:Implementation method one:
可选的,状态为主通信设备的所述第一通信设备可以在监测到自身运行状态较差(例如硬件温度达到预设值,或者系统软件版本较低亟待升级等),或者状态为主通信设备的持续时间达到设定时长时,触发状态变更。Optionally, the first communication device whose status is the master communication device may detect that its operating status is poor (for example, the hardware temperature reaches a preset value, or the system software version is low and needs to be upgraded, etc.), or the status is the master communication device. When the duration of the device reaches the set duration, the status change is triggered.
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图11所示,状态变更触发子流程具体包括:Example 1: In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. As shown in Figure 11, the state change triggering sub-process specifically includes:
S1101:所述第一通信设备通过所述第三通信设备向所述网络设备发送第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备。S1101: The first communication device sends a first state change instruction to the network device through the third communication device, where the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is controlled by the main communication device Change to standby communication equipment.
可选的,所述第一状态变更指示中包含以下任意一项或组合:主备通信设备对应关系标识、所述第一通信设备的标识、所述第一通信设备的网络标识、所述第一通信设备的状态指示、第二通信设备的标识、第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的状态指示、状态变更原因指示。Optionally, the first state change indication includes any one or a combination of the following: the identification of the correspondence between the active and standby communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, the network identification of the first communication device, the first communication device A status indication of a communication device, an identification of the second communication device, a network identification of the second communication device, a status indication of the second communication device, and an indication of the reason for the status change.
S1102:所述网络设备在接收到所述第一状态变更指示后,确定所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备(状态变更前)为所述第二通信设备,对本地维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更,然后通过所述第三通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送第二状态变更指示,所述第二状态变更指示用于通知所述第二通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备。S1102: After receiving the first state change instruction, the network device determines that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device (before the state change) is the second communication device, and has a status of the communication device maintained locally The states of the first communication device and the second communication device in the configuration information are changed, and then a second state change instruction is sent to the second communication device through the third communication device, the second state change instruction It is used to notify that the status of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
可选的,当所述第一状态变更指示中不包含所述第二通信设备的标识和网络标识时,所述网络设备可以通过主备通信设备对应关系确定所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备,所述网络设备还可以通过所述第一状态变更指示中的内容,确定所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备。Optionally, when the first state change indication does not include the identifier of the second communication device and the network identifier, the network device may determine the backup device corresponding to the first communication device through the corresponding relationship between the master and backup communication devices. The communication device is the second communication device, and the network device may also determine that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device based on the content in the first state change instruction.
例如,所述网络设备可以通过主备通信设备对应关系标识、所述第一通信设备的标识、所述第一通信设备的网络标识等,先确定包含所述第一通信设备的目标主备通信设备对应 关系,然后在所述目标主备通信设备对应关系中包含的另一个通信设备(所述第二通信设备)为所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备。For example, the network device may first determine the target master-backup communication of the first communication device through the identification of the correspondence between the master and backup communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, the network identification of the first communication device, etc. Device correspondence, and then another communication device (the second communication device) included in the target master-backup communication device correspondence is the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device.
可选的,在本示例1中,在所述第三通信设备中也维护有通信设备状态配置信息的情况下,所述第三通信设备在接收到所述第一状态变更指示,可以通过上述网络设备的方式,对本地维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更。当所述第三通信设备未执行上述过程时,而是不对第一状态变更指示进行处理,直接转发给所述网络设备时,所述网络设备还可以通过S1103a或S1103b,指示所述第三通信设备对维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更。Optionally, in this example 1, in the case that the third communication device also maintains the communication device state configuration information, the third communication device may receive the first state change instruction through the above In the manner of a network device, the states of the first communication device and the second communication device in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information are changed. When the third communication device does not perform the above process, but does not process the first state change instruction and forwards it directly to the network device, the network device may also instruct the third communication through S1103a or S1103b The device changes the states of the first communication device and the second communication device in the maintained communication device state configuration information.
S1103a:所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送第三状态变更指示,所述第三状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,和/或,所述第二通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备。S1103a: The network device sends a third state change instruction to the third communication device, where the third state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the backup communication device, and /Or, the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
S1103b:所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送进行状态更新后的所述通信设备状态配置信息。在更新后的所述通信设备状态配置信息中,所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备,所述第二通信设备的状态为主通信设备。S1103b: The network device sends the state configuration information of the communication device after the state update to the third communication device. In the updated state configuration information of the communication device, the state of the first communication device is the standby communication device, and the state of the second communication device is the master communication device.
示例2:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接连接所述网络设备的情况下。状态变更触发子流程的具体流程也可以参见图11。不同的是,第一通信设备、第二通信设备与所述网络设备之间消息交互无需通过第三通信设备转发。Example 2: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device. The specific process of the state change triggering sub-process can also be seen in Figure 11. The difference is that the message interaction between the first communication device, the second communication device, and the network device does not need to be forwarded through the third communication device.
示例3:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图12所示,状态变更触发子流程具体包括:Example 3: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to Figure 12, the state change triggering sub-process specifically includes:
S1201:与S1101相同,此处不再赘述。S1201: Same as S1101, and will not be repeated here.
S1202:所述网络设备在接收到所述第一状态变更指示后,确定所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备(状态变更前)为所述第二通信设备,对本地维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更;然后向所述第三通信设备发送更新后的所述通信设备状态配置信息。S1202: After receiving the first state change instruction, the network device determines that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device (before the state change) is the second communication device, and has a status of the communication device maintained locally The state of the first communication device and the second communication device in the configuration information is changed; and then the updated state configuration information of the communication device is sent to the third communication device.
S1203:所述第三通信设备在收到所述更新后的通信设备状态配置信息后,确定所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备(状态变更前)为所述第二通信设备,然后向所述第二通信设备发送所述第二状态变更指示。其中,所述第二状态变更指示用于通知所述第二通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备。S1203: After receiving the updated communication device status configuration information, the third communication device determines that the standby communication device (before the status change) corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device, and then sends The second communication device sends the second state change instruction. Wherein, the second state change indication is used to notify that the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
实现方式二:Implementation method two:
可选的,状态为备通信设备的所述第二通信设备可以在监测到第一通信设备运行异常,或者状态为备通信设备的持续时间达到设定时长时,触发状态变更。Optionally, the second communication device in the state of the standby communication device may trigger the state change when it detects that the first communication device operates abnormally, or when the duration of the state of the standby communication device reaches a set duration.
参阅图13和图14所示,与实现方式一中的各个示例类似,因此具体流程可以参见以上实现方式一中的相关描述,此处不再赘述。不同的是,所述第二通信设备向网络设备发送第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备。所述网络设备或第三通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送的第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备。Refer to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, which are similar to the examples in the first implementation manner. Therefore, the specific process can be referred to the related description in the above implementation manner 1, which will not be repeated here. The difference is that the second communication device sends a first state change instruction to the network device, and the first state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device. The second state change instruction sent by the network device or the third communication device to the first communication device is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device.
可选的,状态为备通信设备的所述第二通信设备可以是未开启或者未激活IAB的通信设备。可选的,所述第二通信设备可以采用如图8所示的流程请求成为主通信设备,即所 述第二通信设备向网络设备发送请求信息。其中,所述请求信息用于请求开启或者激活IAB。Optionally, the second communication device in the status of the standby communication device may be a communication device that is not turned on or that does not activate IAB. Optionally, the second communication device may use the process shown in FIG. 8 to request to become the master communication device, that is, the second communication device sends request information to the network device. Wherein, the request information is used to request to open or activate the IAB.
可选的,所述请求信息包含第二通信设备的IAB节点识别码。Optionally, the request information includes the IAB node identification code of the second communication device.
可选的,所述请求信息包含第一通信设备的IAB节点识别码和/或C-RNTI。Optionally, the request information includes the IAB node identification code and/or C-RNTI of the first communication device.
可选的,所述请求信息为接入回传一体化连接请求消息或者接入回传一体化激活请求消息或者接入回传一体化开启请求或者接入回传一体化准许请求。Optionally, the request information is an access backhaul integrated connection request message or an access backhaul integrated activation request message or an access backhaul integrated start request or an access backhaul integrated permission request.
当所述第二通信设备接收到所述网络设备发送的配置信息时,所述第二通信设备确定自身的状态变更为主通信设备。When the second communication device receives the configuration information sent by the network device, the second communication device determines that its state is changed to the master communication device.
实现方式三:Implementation mode three:
可选的,所述第三通信设备可以在监测到通信异常(例如业务数据重传次数大于设定数目),或者确定所述第一通信设备状态为主通信设备的持续时间达到设定时长时,触发状态变更。Optionally, the third communication device may detect a communication abnormality (for example, the number of retransmissions of service data is greater than a set number), or determine that the state of the first communication device is the main communication device and the duration reaches the set time period. To trigger a status change.
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图11所示,状态变更触发子流程具体包括:Example 1: In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to Figure 11, the state change triggering sub-process specifically includes:
S1501:所述第三通信设备确定当前满足上述状态变更条件后,向所述网络设备发送第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,和/或,所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备变更为主通信设备;或者所述第三通信设备对本地维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更,然后向所述网络设备发送更新后的所述通信设备状态配置信息。S1501: After determining that the above-mentioned state change condition is currently met, the third communication device sends a first state change instruction to the network device, where the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is controlled by the host The communication device is changed to a standby communication device, and/or, the status of the second communication device is changed to the standby communication device as the master communication device; or the third communication device responds to the first communication device status configuration information maintained locally The state of a communication device and the second communication device is changed, and then the updated state configuration information of the communication device is sent to the network device.
所述网络设备在接收到所述第一状态变更指示或所述第三通信设备更新后的通信设备状态配置信息后,也对本地维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更。After the network device receives the first state change instruction or the updated communication device state configuration information of the third communication device, it also checks the first communication device and all communication devices in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information. The state of the second communication device is changed.
S1502:所述网络设备通过所述第三通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送第二状态变更指示。所述第二状态变更指示用于通知所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备。S1502: The network device sends a second state change instruction to the first communication device through the third communication device. The second state change indication is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from a main communication device to a backup communication device.
S1503:所述网络设备通过所述第三通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送第三状态变更指示。所述第三状态变更指示用于通知所述第二通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备。S1503: The network device sends a third state change instruction to the second communication device through the third communication device. The third state change indication is used to notify that the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
实现方式四:Realization way four:
可选的,所述网络设备可以在确定所述第一通信设备状态为主通信设备的持续时间达到设定时长时或者接收到技术人员输入的状态变更的通知后,触发状态变更。Optionally, the network device may trigger the state change after determining that the state of the first communication device is the main communication device for a duration of a set duration or after receiving a notification of the state change input by a technician.
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图16所示,状态变更触发子流程具体包括:Example 1: In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to Figure 16, the state change triggering sub-process specifically includes:
S1601:所述网络设备确定当前满足上述状态变更条件后,对本地维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更,并向所述第一通信设备发送第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备。S1601: After the network device determines that the above-mentioned state change condition is currently met, it changes the state of the first communication device and the second communication device in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information, and communicates to the first communication device. The device sends a first state change instruction, where the first state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from a main communication device to a backup communication device.
S1602:所述网络设备向所述第二通信设备发送第二状态变更指示,所述第二状态变 更指示用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备。S1602: The network device sends a second state change instruction to the second communication device, where the second state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
可选的,在所述第三通信设备中也维护有通信设备状态配置信息的情况下,所述第三通信设备在接收到所述第一状态变更指示和所述第二状态变更指示后,可以对本地维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更。当所述第三通信设备未执行上述过程时,而是不对第一状态变更指示和第二状态变更指示进行处理,直接转发给所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备时,所述网络设备还可以通过S1603,通知所述第三通信设备对维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更。Optionally, when the third communication device also maintains communication device state configuration information, after the third communication device receives the first state change instruction and the second state change instruction, The states of the first communication device and the second communication device in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information may be changed. When the third communication device does not perform the above process, but does not process the first state change instruction and the second state change instruction, and directly forwards them to the first communication device and the second communication device, the The network device may also notify the third communication device to change the state of the first communication device and the second communication device in the maintained communication device state configuration information through S1603.
S1603:所述网络设备将自身维护的已经变更的通信设备状态配置信息发送给所述第三通信设备。S1603: The network device sends the changed communication device state configuration information maintained by the network device to the third communication device.
示例2:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接连接所述网络设备的情况下。状态变更触发子流程的具体流程也可以参见图16。不同的是,第一通信设备、第二通信设备与所述网络设备之间消息交互无需通过第三通信设备转发。Example 2: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device. The specific process of the state change triggering sub-process can also be seen in Figure 16. The difference is that the message interaction between the first communication device, the second communication device, and the network device does not need to be forwarded through the third communication device.
示例3:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图16所示,状态变更触发子流程具体包括:Example 3: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to Figure 16, the state change triggering sub-process specifically includes:
S1701:所述网络设备确定当前满足上述状态变更条件后,对本地维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更。然后,所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,和/或,所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备变更为主通信设备;或者所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送更新后的所述通信设备状态配置信息。S1701: The network device changes the state of the first communication device and the second communication device in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information after determining that the above-mentioned state change condition is currently satisfied. Then, the network device sends a first state change instruction to the third communication device, where the first state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, and /Or, the status of the second communication device is that the standby communication device changes to the master communication device; or the network device sends the updated communication device status configuration information to the third communication device.
S1702:所述第三通信设备根据接收的所述第一状态变更指示或所述网络设备更新的通信设备状态配置信息,向所述第一通信设备发送第二状态变更指示。所述第二状态变更指示用于通知所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备。S1702: The third communication device sends a second state change instruction to the first communication device according to the received first state change instruction or the communication device state configuration information updated by the network device. The second state change indication is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from a main communication device to a backup communication device.
S1703:所述第三通信设备根据接收的所述第一状态变更指示或所述网络设备更新的通信设备状态配置信息,向所述第二通信设备发送第三状态变更指示。所述第三状态变更指示用于通知所述第二通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备。S1703: The third communication device sends a third state change instruction to the second communication device according to the received first state change instruction or the communication device state configuration information updated by the network device. The third state change indication is used to notify that the state of the second communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
示例5:所述网络设备确定当前满足上述状态变更条件后,所述网络设备向所述第二通信设备发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置所述第二通信设备开启或激活IAB。Example 5: After the network device determines that the above state change condition is currently met, the network device sends configuration information to the second communication device, where the configuration information is used to configure the second communication device to enable or activate IAB.
可选的,所述配置信息可以是接入回传一体化配置消息或者接入回传一体化连接配置消息或者接入回传一体化建立消息或者接入回传一体化连接建立消息。Optionally, the configuration information may be an access backhaul integrated configuration message or an access backhaul integrated connection configuration message or an access backhaul integrated establishment message or an access backhaul integrated connection establishment message.
可选的,所述配置信息包含IAB激活指示或者IAB开启指示。Optionally, the configuration information includes an IAB activation instruction or an IAB activation instruction.
示例6:所述网络设备确定当前满足上述状态变更条件后,所述网络设备向所述第一通信设备发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于配置所述第一通信设备关闭或未开启或去激活或未激活IAB。Example 6: After the network device determines that the above state change condition is currently met, the network device sends configuration information to the first communication device, and the configuration information is used to configure the first communication device to be turned off or not turned on or IAB is activated or not activated.
可选的,所述配置信息可以是接入回传一体化释放消息或者接入回传一体化连接释放消息。Optionally, the configuration information may be an access backhaul integrated release message or an access backhaul integrated connection release message.
可选的,所述配置信息包含IAB去激活指示或者IAB关闭指示。Optionally, the configuration information includes an IAB deactivation instruction or an IAB shutdown instruction.
还需要注意的是,在上述四个实现方式中,当核心网设备中维护了通信设备状态配置信息时所述网络设备在确定所述第一通信设备的状态变更后,还需要向所述核心网设备发 送状态变更指示。可选的,该状态变更指示可以携带在UE上下文修改指示(UE context modification indication)中。It should also be noted that in the above four implementation manners, when the state configuration information of the communication device is maintained in the core network device, the network device needs to notify the core network device after determining that the state of the first communication device has changed. The network device sends a status change instruction. Optionally, the status change indication may be carried in a UE context modification indication (UE context modification indication).
实现方式五:Implementation mode five:
可选的,所述核心网设备可以在确定所述第一通信设备状态为主通信设备的持续时间达到设定时长时,或者接收到技术人员输入的状态变更的通知后,触发状态变更。Optionally, the core network device may trigger the state change when it is determined that the duration of the first communication device state as the main communication device reaches a set duration, or after receiving a notification of state change input by a technician.
所述核心网设备确定当前满足上述状态变更条件后,对本地维护的通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备的状态进行变更。然后,所述核心网设备向所述网络设备发送第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,和/或,所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备变更为主通信设备;或者所述核心网设备向所述网络设备发送更新后的所述通信设备状态配置信息。After the core network device determines that the above-mentioned state change condition is currently met, the state of the first communication device and the second communication device in the locally maintained communication device state configuration information is changed. Then, the core network device sends a first state change instruction to the network device, where the first state change instruction is used to notify that the state of the first communication device is changed from a primary communication device to a backup communication device, and/ Or, the status of the second communication device is that the standby communication device changes to the master communication device; or the core network device sends the updated communication device status configuration information to the network device.
可选的,所述第一状态变更指示可以携带在UE上下文修改请求(UE context modification Request)中。Optionally, the first state change indication may be carried in a UE context modification request (UE context modification Request).
后续,所述网络设备可以根据接收的所述第一状态变更指示或所述核心网设备更新的所述通信设备状态配置信息,通知第一通信设备和第二通信设备各自的状态。具体的,所述网络设备可以通过上述实现方式四中的各个示例中的方法,通知第一通信设备和第二通信设备各自的状态,因此,实现方式五中的各个示例的流程可以参见实现方式四中的各个示例的流程,此处不再赘述。Subsequently, the network device may notify the respective states of the first communication device and the second communication device according to the received first state change instruction or the communication device state configuration information updated by the core network device. Specifically, the network device may notify the respective states of the first communication device and the second communication device through the methods in each example in the fourth implementation manner. Therefore, for the process of each example in the implementation manner five, refer to the implementation manner The process of each example in the fourth is not repeated here.
需要说明的是,在上述各个实现方式中的各个示例中涉及的状态变更指示中包含以下任意一项或组合:主备通信设备对应关系标识、所述第一通信设备的标识、所述第一通信设备的网络标识、所述第一通信设备的状态指示、第二通信设备的标识、第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的状态指示、状态变更原因指示。It should be noted that the status change indications involved in each example in each of the above implementations include any one or a combination of the following: the identification of the correspondence between the active and standby communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, and the first communication device. The network identification of the communication device, the status indication of the first communication device, the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the status indication of the second communication device, and the status change reason indication.
在状态变更触发子流程过程中或结束后,即在所述网络设备在更新自身维护的通信设备状态配置信息后,通信系统可以开始执行无线接口的配置子流程,对所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备进行无线接口配置,以便所述网络设备可以释放与所述第一通信设备的无线连接,并与所述第二通信设备建立无线连接。During or after the state change triggering sub-process, that is, after the network device updates the state configuration information of the communication device maintained by the network device, the communication system may start to execute the wireless interface configuration sub-process, and perform the wireless interface configuration sub-process for the first communication device and The second communication device performs wireless interface configuration so that the network device can release the wireless connection with the first communication device and establish a wireless connection with the second communication device.
可选的,在本申请实施例中,所述网络设备可以通过传统的RRC释放过程,释放与所述第一通信设备的RRC连接。然后,所述第一通信设备就可以终止其管理的中继小区的通信服务。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the network device may release the RRC connection with the first communication device through a traditional RRC release process. Then, the first communication device can terminate the communication service of the relay cell it manages.
可选的,所述网络设备可以通过RRC重配置过程,与所述第二通信设备建立RRC连接。Optionally, the network device may establish an RRC connection with the second communication device through an RRC reconfiguration process.
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图18所示,所述网络设备与所述第二通信设备建立RRC连接的过程具体包括:Example 1: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to FIG. 18, the process of establishing an RRC connection between the network device and the second communication device specifically includes:
S1801:所述网络设备在更新自身维护的通信设备状态配置信息后,更新路由表,并向所述第三通信设备发送G1口RRC连接重配置(RRC connection reconfiguration)。S1801: The network device updates the routing table after updating the state configuration information of the communication device maintained by itself, and sends a G1 port RRC connection reconfiguration (RRC connection reconfiguration) to the third communication device.
S1802:所述第三通信设备在接收到所述第三通信设备发送的G1口RRC连接重配置后,更新路由表,并向所述第二通信设备发送Ur口RRC连接重配置。S1802: The third communication device updates the routing table after receiving the G1 port RRC connection reconfiguration sent by the third communication device, and sends the Ur port RRC connection reconfiguration to the second communication device.
可选的,所述Ur口RRC连接重配置中包含路由信息。Optionally, the Ur port RRC connection reconfiguration includes routing information.
S1803:所述第二通信设备根据接收的所述Ur口RRC连接重配置进行无线接口配置,配置完成后,向所述第三通信设备发送Ur口RRC连接重配置完成(RRC connection reconfiguration complete)。S1803: The second communication device performs radio interface configuration according to the received Ur port RRC connection reconfiguration, and after the configuration is completed, sends the Ur port RRC connection reconfiguration complete (RRC connection reconfiguration complete) to the third communication device.
在本步骤中,所述第二通信设备进行无线接口配置,包括:建立DRB对应的RLC实体,PDCP实体,配置MAC/PHY/适配层等。In this step, the wireless interface configuration performed by the second communication device includes: establishing the RLC entity corresponding to the DRB, the PDCP entity, and configuring the MAC/PHY/adaptation layer.
S1804:所述第三通信设备在接收到所述Ur口RRC连接重配置完成后,向所述网络设备发送G1口RRC连接重配置完成。S1804: After receiving the completion of the Ur port RRC connection reconfiguration, the third communication device sends the G1 port RRC connection reconfiguration completion to the network device.
S1805:所述网络设备在接收到所述第三通信设备发送的G1口RRC连接重配置完成后,向所述第二通信设备发送G1口RRC连接重配置。S1805: After receiving the G1-port RRC connection reconfiguration sent by the third communication device, the network device sends the G1-port RRC connection reconfiguration to the second communication device.
S1806:所述第二通信设备根据接收的所述网络设备发送的所述G1口RRC连接重配置进行无线接口配置,配置完成后,向所述网络设备发送G1口RRC连接重配置完成。S1806: The second communication device performs wireless interface configuration according to the received G1-port RRC connection reconfiguration sent by the network device, and after the configuration is completed, sends the G1-port RRC connection reconfiguration completion to the network device.
在本步骤中,所述第二通信设备进行无线接口配置,包括:创建中继小区(即所述第二通信设备管理的小区),以及建立子链路侧RLC实体,初始化MAC/PHY/适配层,初始化Ur口RRC层等In this step, the wireless interface configuration performed by the second communication device includes: creating a relay cell (that is, a cell managed by the second communication device), establishing a sub-link side RLC entity, and initializing MAC/PHY/suitability Configuration layer, initializing Ur port RRC layer, etc.
其中,在本示例1中的S1803和S1806中,所述第二通信设备需要通过S1800获取通信配置信息,并根据所述通信配置信息进行无线接口配置。Wherein, in S1803 and S1806 in this example 1, the second communication device needs to obtain communication configuration information through S1800, and perform wireless interface configuration according to the communication configuration information.
S1800:所述第二通信设备获取通信配置信息。S1800: The second communication device obtains communication configuration information.
其中,所述通信配置信息中包含以下任意一项或组合:Wherein, the communication configuration information includes any one or combination of the following:
第一通信设备的无线资源配置信息、第一通信设备进行数据传输时缓存的数据、第四通信设备的网络标识、所述第四通信设备的上下文、所述第四通信设备的服务质量QoS信息、所述第四通信设备的数据无线承载标识DRB ID、所述第四通信设备的无线资源配置信息。其中,所述第四通信设备是所述第一通信设备或所述第二通信设备的子节点。Wireless resource configuration information of the first communication device, data buffered when the first communication device performs data transmission, the network identification of the fourth communication device, the context of the fourth communication device, and the quality of service QoS information of the fourth communication device , The data radio bearer ID DRB ID of the fourth communication device, and the radio resource configuration information of the fourth communication device. Wherein, the fourth communication device is a child node of the first communication device or the second communication device.
其中,所述第一通信设备进行数据传输时缓存的数据可以但不限于包括以下内容:所述第一通信设备与所述网络设备或所述第三通信设备进行数据传输时缓存的数据、所述第一通信设备与所述第四通信设备进行数据传输时缓存的数据。Wherein, the data buffered during data transmission by the first communication device may include, but is not limited to, the following content: data buffered during data transmission between the first communication device and the network device or the third communication device; Data buffered when the first communication device and the fourth communication device perform data transmission.
可选的,所述第一通信设备的无线资源配置信息包括:DRB对应的RLC配置信息、PDCP配置信息、MAC配置信息、PHY配置信息等,以及中继小区配置信息(例如,小区标识、小区网络标识资源池等),以及子链路侧RLC对应的RLC配置信息、MAC配置信息、PHY配置信息等。Optionally, the radio resource configuration information of the first communication device includes: RLC configuration information, PDCP configuration information, MAC configuration information, PHY configuration information, etc. corresponding to the DRB, and relay cell configuration information (for example, cell identification, cell Network identification resource pool, etc.), and RLC configuration information, MAC configuration information, PHY configuration information, etc. corresponding to the RLC on the sub-link side.
所述第二通信设备在执行S1803时,可以根据无线资源配置信息中的DRB对应的RLC配置信息、PDCP配置信息、MAC配置信息、PHY配置信息等,建立DRB对应的RLC实体,PDCP实体,配置MAC/PHY/适配层等。When the second communication device executes S1803, it can establish the RLC entity corresponding to the DRB according to the RLC configuration information, PDCP configuration information, MAC configuration information, PHY configuration information, etc. corresponding to the DRB in the radio resource configuration information. MAC/PHY/adaptation layer, etc.
所述第二通信设备在执行S1806时,可以根据中继小区配置信息创建中继小区;以及根据所述子链路侧RLC对应的RLC配置信息、MAC配置信息、PHY配置信息等,建立子链路侧RLC实体,初始化MAC/PHY/适配层,初始化Ur口RRC层等。When the second communication device performs S1806, it can create a relay cell according to the relay cell configuration information; and establish a sub-chain according to the RLC configuration information, MAC configuration information, PHY configuration information, etc. corresponding to the sub-link side RLC The roadside RLC entity initializes the MAC/PHY/adaptation layer, initializes the RRC layer of the Ur port, etc.
可选的,当所述第二通信设备为中继设备时,所述第二通信设备在创建中继小区时,还需要根据以下信息实现:Optionally, when the second communication device is a relay device, when the second communication device creates a relay cell, it needs to be implemented according to the following information:
所述第四通信设备的网络标识、所述第四通信设备的上下文、所述第四通信设备的服务质量QoS信息、所述第四通信设备的数据无线承载标识DRB ID、所述第四通信设备的 无线资源配置信息。The network identifier of the fourth communication device, the context of the fourth communication device, the quality of service QoS information of the fourth communication device, the data radio bearer ID DRB ID of the fourth communication device, and the fourth communication device The wireless resource configuration information of the device.
示例2:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接连接所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图19所示,所述网络设备与所述第二通信设备建立RRC连接的过程具体包括:Example 2: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device are directly connected to the network device. Referring to FIG. 19, the process of establishing an RRC connection between the network device and the second communication device specifically includes:
S1901:所述网络设备在更新自身维护的通信设备状态配置信息后,更新路由表,并向所述第二通信设备发送RRC连接重配置。S1901: The network device updates the routing table after updating the state configuration information of the communication device maintained by itself, and sends the RRC connection reconfiguration to the second communication device.
S1902:所述第二通信设备根据接收的所述RRC连接重配置进行无线接口配置,配置完成后,向所述网络设备发送RRC连接重配置完成。S1902: The second communication device performs wireless interface configuration according to the received RRC connection reconfiguration, and after the configuration is completed, sends the RRC connection reconfiguration complete to the network device.
在本步骤中,所述第二通信设备进行无线接口配置与示例1中S1803中的描述相同,此处在赘述。In this step, the wireless interface configuration performed by the second communication device is the same as the description in S1803 in Example 1, which is repeated here.
S1903:所述网络设备在接收到所述第二通信设备发送的RRC连接重配置完成后,向所述第二通信设备发送G1口RRC连接重配置。S1903: After receiving the RRC connection reconfiguration sent by the second communication device, the network device sends the G1 port RRC connection reconfiguration to the second communication device.
S1904:所述第二通信设备根据接收的所述网络设备发送的所述G1口RRC连接重配置进行无线接口配置,配置完成后,向所述网络设备发送G1口RRC连接重配置完成。S1904: The second communication device performs wireless interface configuration according to the received G1-port RRC connection reconfiguration sent by the network device, and after the configuration is completed, sends the G1-port RRC connection reconfiguration completion to the network device.
在本步骤中,所述第二通信设备进行无线接口配置与示例1中S1806中的描述相同,此处不再赘述。In this step, the wireless interface configuration performed by the second communication device is the same as the description in S1806 in Example 1, and will not be repeated here.
与示例1中的S1803和S1806相同的,在本示例2中的S1902和S1904中,所述第二通信设备需要通过S1900获取通信配置信息,并根据所述通信配置信息进行无线接口配置。Similar to S1803 and S1806 in example 1, in S1902 and S1904 in this example 2, the second communication device needs to obtain communication configuration information through S1900, and perform wireless interface configuration according to the communication configuration information.
S1900:所述第二通信设备获取通信配置信息。在本示例中,所述通信配置信息的相关描述,以及所述第二通信设备根据通信配置信息进行无线接口配置的相关描述,可以参见以上实施例,此处不再赘述。S1900: The second communication device obtains communication configuration information. In this example, the related description of the communication configuration information and the related description of the wireless interface configuration performed by the second communication device according to the communication configuration information can be referred to the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
可选的,在本申请实施例中,所述第二通信设备可以但不限于通过以下实现方式,获取通信配置信息(执行上述S1800或S1900):Optionally, in this embodiment of the application, the second communication device may, but is not limited to, obtain communication configuration information through the following implementation manners (execute the foregoing S1800 or S1900):
实现方式一:所述第二通信设备从所述第一通信设备获取所述通信配置信息。Implementation manner 1: The second communication device obtains the communication configuration information from the first communication device.
实现方式二:所述第二通信设备从所述网络设备获取所述通信配置信息。Implementation manner 2: The second communication device obtains the communication configuration information from the network device.
实现方式三:所述第二通信设备从所述第三通信设备获取所述通信配置信息。Implementation manner 3: The second communication device obtains the communication configuration information from the third communication device.
实现方式四:所述第二通信设备从所述网络设备获取第一通信配置信息集合,从所述第一通信设备获取第二通信配置信息集合。Implementation manner 4: The second communication device obtains a first communication configuration information set from the network device, and obtains a second communication configuration information set from the first communication device.
实现方式五:所述第二通信设备从所述第三通信设备获取所述第一通信配置信息集合,从所述第一通信设备获取所述第二通信配置信息集合。Implementation manner 5: The second communication device obtains the first communication configuration information set from the third communication device, and obtains the second communication configuration information set from the first communication device.
在上述实现方式四和五中,所述通信配置信息中包含第一通信配置信息集合和第二通信配置信息集合。In the foregoing implementation manners 4 and 5, the communication configuration information includes the first communication configuration information set and the second communication configuration information set.
以下对通过示例对各个实现方式进行描述说明。The following describes each implementation manner through examples.
实现方式一:Implementation method one:
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图20所示,所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程具体包括:Example 1: In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to FIG. 20, the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
S2001:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间具有通信连接的情况下,状态为主通信设备的所述第一通信设备在运行过程中,可以周期性的向所述第二通信设备发送最新的通信配置信息。S2001: In the case that there is a communication connection between the first communication device and the second communication device, the first communication device whose status is the master communication device may periodically report to the first communication device during operation. 2. The communication device sends the latest communication configuration information.
所述第二通信设备接收到最新的通信配置信息后,将之前的接收的通信配置信息进行覆盖。After the second communication device receives the latest communication configuration information, it overwrites the previously received communication configuration information.
S2002:所述第二通信设备在确定自身的状态从备通信设备变更为主通信设备后,对保存的通信配置信息的完整性和实时性(与第一通信设备当前保存的通信配置信息一致)进行校验;当所述第二通信设备确定保存的通信配置信息完整且具有实时性,则向通过所述第三通信设备向所述网络设备发送通信配置信息完整指示。其中。所述通信配置信息完整指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备中保存完整的通信配置信息。S2002: After the second communication device determines that its state is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device, the integrity and real-timeness of the saved communication configuration information (consistent with the communication configuration information currently saved by the first communication device) Perform verification; when the second communication device determines that the saved communication configuration information is complete and real-time, it sends a complete communication configuration information indication to the network device through the third communication device. among them. The complete communication configuration information indication is used to notify that complete communication configuration information is stored in the first communication device.
这样,所述网络设备在后期对所述第二通信设备进行无线接口配置的过程中,无需再配置该通信配置信息。In this way, the network device does not need to configure the communication configuration information in the subsequent process of configuring the wireless interface of the second communication device.
示例2:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接接入所述网络设备的情况下。所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程也可以参见图20,不同的是,所述第二通信设备向所述网络设备发送的通信配置信息完整指示无需所述第三通信设备转发。Example 2: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device directly access the network device. The process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information can also be seen in FIG. 20. The difference is that the communication configuration information sent by the second communication device to the network device indicates that the third communication device does not need to forward the communication configuration information. .
示例3:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备,且所述第三通信设备中保存有通信配置信息的情况下。所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程也可以参见图20,不同的是,所述第二通信设备向所述第三网络设备发送的通信配置信息完整指示。其中,所述通信配置信息完整指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备中保存完整的通信配置信息。这样,在网络设备对所述第二通信设备进行无线接口配置的过程中,无需所述第三通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送通信配置信息。Example 3: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device, and communication configuration information is stored in the third communication device. The process of acquiring the communication configuration information by the second communication device may also refer to FIG. 20. The difference is that the communication configuration information sent by the second communication device to the third network device is a complete indication. Wherein, the complete communication configuration information indication is used to notify that complete communication configuration information is stored in the first communication device. In this way, when the network device configures the wireless interface of the second communication device, there is no need for the third communication device to send communication configuration information to the second communication device.
实现方式二:Implementation method two:
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图21所示,所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程具体包括:Example 1: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to FIG. 21, the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
S2101:所述第二通信设备在确定自身的状态从备通信设备变更为主通信设备后,通过所述第三通信设备向所述网络设备发送通信配置信息请求。S2101: The second communication device sends a communication configuration information request to the network device through the third communication device after determining that its state is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
可选的,当状态为主通信设备的所述第一通信设备在运行过程中,周期性的向所述第二通信设备发送最新的通信配置信息时,所述第二通信设备可以在对保存的通信配置信息的完整性和实时性(与第一通信设备当前保存的通信配置信息一致)进行校验并确定校验未通过时,执行S2101。Optionally, when the first communication device in the state of the primary communication device periodically sends the latest communication configuration information to the second communication device during the operation, the second communication device may save the When the integrity and real-timeness of the communication configuration information (consistent with the communication configuration information currently saved by the first communication device) are checked and it is determined that the check fails, S2101 is executed.
S2102:所述网络设备在接收到所述通信配置信息请求后,通过所述第三通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送通信配置信息。S2102: After receiving the communication configuration information request, the network device sends the communication configuration information to the second communication device through the third communication device.
示例2:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接接入所述网络设备的情况下。所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程也可以参见图21,不同的是,所述第二通信设备与所述网络设备进行信息交互时无需所述第三通信设备转发。Example 2: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device directly access the network device. The process of obtaining the communication configuration information by the second communication device may also refer to FIG. 21. The difference is that the third communication device does not need to forward the information when the second communication device exchanges information with the network device.
实现方式三:Implementation method three:
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图22所示,所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程具体包括:Example 1: In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to FIG. 22, the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
S2201:同实现方式三中的示例1中的S2101,此处不再赘述。S2201: Same as S2101 in Example 1 in the third implementation mode, and will not be repeated here.
S2202:在所述第三通信设备中保存有最新的通信配置信息的情况下,所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送配置指示。所述配置指示用于通知所述第三通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述通信配置信息。S2202: In a case where the latest communication configuration information is stored in the third communication device, the network device sends a configuration instruction to the third communication device. The configuration instruction is used to notify the third communication device to send the communication configuration information to the first communication device.
S2203:所述第三通信设备接收到所述配置指示后,根据所述配置指示向所述第二通信设备发送所述通信配置信息。S2203: After receiving the configuration instruction, the third communication device sends the communication configuration information to the second communication device according to the configuration instruction.
示例2:Example 2:
在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图23所示,所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程具体包括:In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to FIG. 23, the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
S2301:在所述第三通信设备中保存有最新的通信配置信息的情况下,所述第二通信设备向所述第三通信设备发送通信配置信息请求。S2301: In a case where the latest communication configuration information is stored in the third communication device, the second communication device sends a communication configuration information request to the third communication device.
可选的,所述第二通信设备可以在确定自身的状态从备通信设备变更为主通信设备后,执行S2301;也可以在对保存的通信配置信息的完整性和实时性(与第一通信设备当前保存的通信配置信息一致)进行校验并确定校验未通过时,执行S2301。Optionally, the second communication device may execute S2301 after determining that its state is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device; or it may perform S2301 after checking the integrity and real-timeness of the saved communication configuration information (with the first communication device). When the communication configuration information currently saved by the device is consistent), perform verification and determine that the verification fails, then execute S2301.
S2302:所述第三通信设备在接收到所述通信配置信息请求后,向所述第二通信设备发送所述通信配置信息。S2302: After receiving the communication configuration information request, the third communication device sends the communication configuration information to the second communication device.
实现方式四:Realization way four:
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图24所示,所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程具体包括:Example 1: In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to FIG. 24, the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
S2401:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间具有通信连接的情况下,状态为主通信设备的所述第一通信设备在运行过程中,向所述第二通信设备发送第二通信配置信息集合。S2401: In the case that there is a communication connection between the first communication device and the second communication device, the first communication device whose status is the main communication device sends to the second communication device during operation. The second set of communication configuration information.
可选的,所述第二通信配置信息集合可以是所述第二通信设备周期性备份到所述第二通信设备的。可选的,所述第二通信配置信息集合也可以在设定时长内维持不变。Optionally, the second communication configuration information set may be periodically backed up by the second communication device to the second communication device. Optionally, the second set of communication configuration information may also remain unchanged for a set duration.
S2402:所述第二通信设备在确定自身的状态从备通信设备变更为主通信设备后,确定本地保存所述第二通信配置信息集合时,通过所述第三通信设备向所述网络设备发送通信配置信息请求。S2402: After the second communication device determines that its state is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device, and determines to locally save the second communication configuration information set, send to the network device through the third communication device Communication configuration information request.
其中,所述通信配置信息请求用于请求所述第一通信配置信息集合,所述通信配置信息请求中包含第一指示或第二指示,所述第一指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中已经保存所述第二通信配置信息集合,所述第二指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中未保存所述第一通信配置信息集合。The communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, and the first indication is used to indicate the first communication device The second communication configuration information set has been saved in the, and the second indication is used to indicate that the first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
S2403:所述网络设备在接收到所述通信配置信息请求后,根据所述通信配置信息请求中的所述第一指示或第二指示,通过所述第三通信设备向所述第二通信设备发送第一通信配置信息集合。S2403: After receiving the communication configuration information request, the network device sends a message to the second communication device through the third communication device according to the first instruction or the second instruction in the communication configuration information request. Send the first set of communication configuration information.
示例2:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备直接接入所述网络设备的情况下。所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程也可以参见图24,不同的是,所述第二通信设备与所述网络设备进行信息交互时无需所述第三通信设备转发。Example 2: In the case where the first communication device and the second communication device directly access the network device. The process of obtaining the communication configuration information by the second communication device may also refer to FIG. 24. The difference is that the third communication device does not need to forward the information when the second communication device exchanges information with the network device.
实现方式五:Implementation mode five:
示例1:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备的情况下。参阅图24所示,所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程具体包括:Example 1: In a case where the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device. Referring to FIG. 24, the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
S2501、S2502与实现方式四中的示例1的S2401和S2402相同,具体描述可以参照以上对S2401和S2402的描述,此处不再赘述。S2501 and S2502 are the same as S2401 and S2402 of Example 1 in Implementation Mode 4. For specific description, refer to the above description of S2401 and S2402, which will not be repeated here.
S2503:在所述第三通信设备中保存有最新的通信配置信息的情况下,所述网络设备向所述第三通信设备发送配置指示。所述配置指示用于通知所述第三通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一通信配置信息集合。S2503: In a case where the latest communication configuration information is stored in the third communication device, the network device sends a configuration instruction to the third communication device. The configuration instruction is used to notify the third communication device to send the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device.
S2504:所述第三通信设备接收到所述配置指示后,根据所述配置指示向所述第二通信设备发送所述第一通信配置信息集合。S2504: After receiving the configuration instruction, the third communication device sends the first communication configuration information set to the second communication device according to the configuration instruction.
示例2:在所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备通过所述第三通信设备接入所述网络设备,且所述第三通信设备保存有最新的通信配置信息的情况下。参阅图26所示,所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息的过程具体包括:Example 2: When the first communication device and the second communication device access the network device through the third communication device, and the third communication device saves the latest communication configuration information. Referring to FIG. 26, the process for the second communication device to obtain the communication configuration information specifically includes:
S2601与实现方式四中的示例1的S2401相同,具体描述可以参照以上对S2401的描述,此处不再赘述。S2601 is the same as S2401 in Example 1 in the fourth implementation manner. For specific description, refer to the above description of S2401, which will not be repeated here.
S2602:所述第二通信设备在确定自身的状态从备通信设备变更为主通信设备后,确定本地保存所述第二通信配置信息集合时,向所述第三通信设备发送通信配置信息请求。S2602: The second communication device sends a communication configuration information request to the third communication device when it determines that the second communication configuration information set is stored locally after determining that its state is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device.
其中,所述通信配置信息请求用于请求所述第一通信配置信息集合,所述通信配置信息请求中包含第一指示或第二指示,所述第一指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中已经保存所述第二通信配置信息集合,所述第二指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中未保存所述第一通信配置信息集合。Wherein, the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, and the first indication is used to indicate the first communication device The second communication configuration information set has been saved in the, and the second indication is used to indicate that the first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
S2603:所述第三通信设备在接收到所述通信配置信息请求后,根据所述通信配置信息中的所述第一指示或第二指示,向所述第二通信设备发送第一通信配置信息集合。S2603: After receiving the communication configuration information request, the third communication device sends first communication configuration information to the second communication device according to the first instruction or the second instruction in the communication configuration information set.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,上述状态变更触发子流程和无线接口的配置子流程(包含获取通信配置信息的过程)可以在通信系统执行RRC重配置过程中实现。例如,所述网络设备可以在RRC连接重配置中携带状态变更指示或者通信配置信息或配置指示。又例如,第二通信设备可以在RRC连接重配置完成中携带通信配置信息请求或通信配置信息完整指示。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the above-mentioned state change triggering sub-process and the wireless interface configuration sub-process (including the process of obtaining communication configuration information) can be implemented during the RRC reconfiguration process performed by the communication system. For example, the network device may carry a state change indication or communication configuration information or configuration indication in the RRC connection reconfiguration. For another example, the second communication device may carry a communication configuration information request or a complete indication of the communication configuration information in the completion of the RRC connection reconfiguration.
另外,值得注意的是,当通信系统完成所述第二通信设备的状态变更流程后,在满足状态变更触发条件后,还可以继续进行状态变更。In addition, it is worth noting that after the communication system completes the state change process of the second communication device, after the state change trigger condition is satisfied, the state change can be continued.
还需要说明的是,在以上对本申请实施例提供的通信方法中包含的三个过程的描述中,由主通信设备变更为备通信设备可以是指通信设备的状态由IAB开启或激活变更为IAB关闭或者未开启或者去激活或者未激活;由备通信设备变更为主通信设备可以是指通信设备的状态由IAB关闭或者未开启或者去激活或者未激活变更为IAB开启或激活;状态为主通信设备可以是指通信设备的状态为IAB开启或激活;状态为备通信设备可以是指通信设备的状态为IAB关闭或者未开启或去激活或者未激活;另外,配置无线接口可以包含配置IAB。第一通信设备的标识可以是第一通信设备的IAB节点识别码、IMSI、IMEI,或者唯一识别IAB节点的标识,或者其他可以唯一识别第一通信设备的标识。第二通信设备的标识可以是第二通信设备的IAB节点识别码、IMSI、IMEI,或者唯一识别IAB节点的标识,或者其他可以唯一识别第二通信设备的标识。Ur口指的是通信设备与其父节点之间的无线 接口,例如UE和IAB节点之间的无线接口。G1口指的是中继设备与网络设备之间的无线接口,例如IAB节点和基站之间的无线接口。第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间存在配对关系可以是指第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间有连接关系,例如第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间存在无线连接或者有线连接关系。通信设备的子链路指的是通信设备和该通信设备的子节点之间的链路。通信设备的父链路指的是通信设备和该通信设备的父节点之间的链路。第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的主备通信设备对应关系可以是指第一通信设备和第二通信设备之间的配对关系或者关联关系。It should also be noted that, in the above description of the three processes included in the communication method provided in the embodiments of this application, the change from the main communication device to the standby communication device may mean that the state of the communication device is turned on from IAB or activated and changed to IAB. Turned off or not turned on or deactivated or not activated; changing from the standby communication device to the master communication device can mean that the state of the communication device is turned off or not turned on or deactivated or not activated to IAB turned on or activated; the status is master communication The device may refer to the state of the communication device being IAB on or active; the state of the standby communication device may refer to the state of the communication device being IAB off or inactive or deactivated or inactive; in addition, configuring the wireless interface may include configuring IAB. The identifier of the first communication device may be the IAB node identification code, IMSI, IMEI of the first communication device, or an identifier that uniquely identifies the IAB node, or other identifiers that can uniquely identify the first communication device. The identifier of the second communication device may be the IAB node identification code, IMSI, IMEI of the second communication device, or an identifier that uniquely identifies the IAB node, or other identifiers that can uniquely identify the second communication device. Ur interface refers to the wireless interface between a communication device and its parent node, such as the wireless interface between a UE and an IAB node. The G1 port refers to the wireless interface between the relay device and the network device, such as the wireless interface between the IAB node and the base station. The pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device may refer to a connection relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device, for example, there is a wireless connection or a wired connection between the first communication device and the second communication device relationship. The sub-link of the communication device refers to the link between the communication device and the child node of the communication device. The parent link of a communication device refers to the link between the communication device and the parent node of the communication device. The corresponding relationship between the master and backup communication devices between the first communication device and the second communication device may refer to a pairing relationship or an association relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
通过以上对三个过程的描述可知,在本申请实施例提供的通信方法中,状态为备通信设备的通信设备可以随时接替对应的主通信设备的传输任务,继续进行业务传输。这样,通信系统通过通信设备的主备通信设备的状态变更,既可以保证业务传输的连续性,又可以避免通信设备长时间运行工作从而延长通信设备的使用寿命,进一步提高约传输的效率,提高了用户的体验。From the above description of the three processes, it can be seen that in the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the communication device in the standby communication device status can take over the transmission task of the corresponding main communication device at any time and continue to perform service transmission. In this way, the communication system can ensure the continuity of service transmission by changing the status of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, and can also prevent the communication device from running for a long time, thereby prolonging the service life of the communication device, and further improving the transmission efficiency. Improve the user experience.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置,该装置的结构如图27所示,包括通信单元2701和处理单元2702。所述装置2700可以应用第一通信设备中或网络设备中。其中,所述第一通信设备和所述网络设备可以适用于图1所示的通信系统中,并可以实现以上各图中的通信方法。Based on the above embodiments, an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device. The structure of the device is as shown in FIG. 27 and includes a communication unit 2701 and a processing unit 2702. The apparatus 2700 can be applied to the first communication device or the network device. Wherein, the first communication device and the network device may be applicable to the communication system shown in FIG. 1, and may implement the communication methods in the above figures.
当所述装置2700应用于第一通信设备中时,可选的,各个单元的功能如下:When the apparatus 2700 is applied to a first communication device, optionally, the functions of each unit are as follows:
通信单元2701,用于向网络设备发送第一状态变更指示,或者获取第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,或者由主通信设备变更为备通信设备;以及获取通信配置信息;The communication unit 2701 is configured to send a first state change instruction to a network device, or obtain a first state change instruction, where the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed by the standby communication device Communication equipment, or change from main communication equipment to backup communication equipment; and obtain communication configuration information;
处理单元2702,用于根据所述通信配置信息配置无线接口。The processing unit 2702 is configured to configure a wireless interface according to the communication configuration information.
可选的,各个单元的功能还可以如下:Optionally, the functions of each unit can also be as follows:
所述处理单元2702通过所述通信单元2701向所述网络设备发送请求信息,或者通过所述通信单元2701接收查询指示;其中,所述请求信息用于请求:所述第一通信设备成为主通信设备,所述查询指示用于指示所述第一通信设备向网络设备发送配对状态信息。The processing unit 2702 sends request information to the network device via the communication unit 2701, or receives a query instruction via the communication unit 2701; wherein the request information is used to request: the first communication device becomes the main communication device Device, the query instruction is used to instruct the first communication device to send pairing status information to the network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述请求信息包含:所述第一通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码和/或第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码;其中,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间存在配对关系。In a possible implementation manner, the request information includes: the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the first communication device and/or the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the second communication device; where There is a pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述配对状态信息包含以下的一项或多项:与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的标识、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的IAB节点识别码、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的C-RNTI、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的状态指示。其中,所述状态指示用于指示与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的状态为备通信设备或主通信设备。In a possible implementation manner, the pairing status information includes one or more of the following: an identifier of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and a pairing relationship with the first communication device The IAB node identification code of the communication device, the C-RNTI of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and the status indication of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device. Wherein, the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,在获取所述第一状态变更指示时,具体用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is specifically configured to: when acquiring the first state change indication:
接收所述网络设备或者第三通信设备发送的所述第一状态变更指示,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者Receiving the first state change indication sent by the network device or a third communication device, where the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
接收第二通信设备发送的所述第一状态变更指示,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或备通信设备。Receiving the first state change instruction sent by a second communication device, where the second communication device was a primary communication device or a backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device was changed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
在向所述网络设备发送所述第一状态变更指示之前,执行以下步骤:Before sending the first state change instruction to the network device, perform the following steps:
向所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送状态信息,所述状态信息用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者Sending status information to the network device or the third communication device, where the status information is used to notify: the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者Receiving a status indication sent by the network device or a third communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the first communication device; The parent node of the communication device; or
接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的通信设备状态配置信息,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者Receiving the communication device status configuration information sent by the network device or the third communication device, where the status of the first communication device in the communication device status configuration information is the standby communication device or the main communication device, the third communication device Is the parent node of the first communication device; or
接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的第二状态变更指示,所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Receive a second state change instruction sent by the network device or the third communication device, where the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, or the standby The communication device is changed to the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,在向所述网络设备发送所述状态信息时,具体用于:In a possible implementation, the communication unit 2701 is specifically configured to: when sending the status information to the network device:
向所述网络设备发送所述第一通信设备的标识,其中,所述第一通信设备的标识中包含指示字段,所述指示字段用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者Send the identification of the first communication device to the network device, where the identification of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or Main communication equipment; or
向所述网络设备发送第二通信设备的指示信息,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;或者Sending instruction information of a second communication device to the network device, where the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device; or
向所述网络设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者Sending a status indication to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
向所述网络设备发送所述第一通信设备的标识和状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第一通信设备的标识用于通知:所述状态指示所指示的状态是第一通信设备的状态;或者The identification and status indication of the first communication device are sent to the network device, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is a standby communication device or a main communication device, and the identification of the first communication device is used to notify: the status Indicating that the indicated state is the state of the first communication device; or
向所述网络设备发送状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备为所述第二通信设备;或者Send a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device, and the indication information of the second communication device is used to indicate all The main communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device; or
向所述网络设备发送状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;Send a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the state of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the indication information of the second communication device is used to indicate all The standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device;
其中,所述第二通信设备的指示信息为以下任一项:所述第二通信设备的标识、所述第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的用户标识、所述第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码。Wherein, the indication information of the second communication device is any one of the following: the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, the second communication device The access of the communication equipment returns the integrated node identification code.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,在获取所述通信配置信息时,具体用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is specifically configured to: when acquiring the communication configuration information:
从第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备;或者Acquiring the communication configuration information from a second communication device, the second communication device being the master communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed; or
从所述网络设备或第三通信设备接收所述通信配置信息,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者Receiving the communication configuration information from the network device or a third communication device, the third communication device being the parent node of the first communication device; or
从所述网络设备或第三通信设备接收第一通信配置信息集合,以及从所述第二通信设备获取所述第二通信配置信息集合,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;其中,所述通信配置信息中包含所述第一通信配置信息集合和所述第二通信配置信息集合。Receive a first set of communication configuration information from the network device or a third communication device, and obtain the second set of communication configuration information from the second communication device, where the third communication device is the device of the first communication device Parent node; wherein the communication configuration information includes the first communication configuration information set and the second communication configuration information set.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
在从所述第二通信设备获取所述通信配置信息之后,向所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送通信配置信息完整指示,所述通信配置信息完整指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备中保存完整的所述通信配置信息,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。After acquiring the communication configuration information from the second communication device, send a communication configuration information complete indication to the network device or a third communication device, where the communication configuration information complete indication is used to notify: the first communication device The complete communication configuration information is stored in the file, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
在从所述网络设备或所述第三通信设备接收所述通信配置信息之前,向所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送通信配置信息请求。Before receiving the communication configuration information from the network device or the third communication device, send a communication configuration information request to the network device or the third communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
在从所述网络设备或所述第三通信设备接收所述第一通信配置信息集合之前,在所述处理单元2702确定本地保存所述第二通信配置信息集合后,向所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送通信配置信息请求;Before receiving the first set of communication configuration information from the network device or the third communication device, after the processing unit 2702 determines that the second set of communication configuration information is stored locally, send it to the network device or the third communication device. 3. The communication device sends a request for communication configuration information;
其中,所述通信配置信息请求用于请求所述第一通信配置信息集合,所述通信配置信息请求中包含第一指示或第二指示,所述第一指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中已经保存所述第二通信配置信息集合,所述第二指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中未保存所述第一通信配置信息集合。Wherein, the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, the communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, and the first indication is used to indicate the first communication device The second communication configuration information set has been saved in the, and the second indication is used to indicate that the first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信配置信息包含以下任意一项或组合:In a possible implementation manner, the communication configuration information includes any one or a combination of the following:
第二通信设备的无线资源配置信息、第二通信设备进行数据传输时缓存的数据、第四通信设备的网络标识、所述第四通信设备的上下文、所述第四通信设备的服务质量QoS信息、所述第四通信设备的数据无线承载标识DRB ID、所述第四通信设备的无线资源配置信息;Wireless resource configuration information of the second communication device, data buffered when the second communication device performs data transmission, the network identification of the fourth communication device, the context of the fourth communication device, and the quality of service QoS information of the fourth communication device , The data radio bearer ID DRB ID of the fourth communication device, and the radio resource configuration information of the fourth communication device;
其中,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备,所述第四通信设备是所述第一通信设备或所述第二通信设备的子节点。Wherein, the second communication device is the master communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed, and the fourth communication device is the first communication device or the second communication device. The child node of the communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一状态变更指示中包含以下任意一项或组合:主备通信设备对应关系标识、所述第一通信设备的标识、所述第一通信设备的网络标识、所述第一通信设备的状态指示、第二通信设备的标识、第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的状态指示、状态变更原因指示;In a possible implementation manner, the first state change indication includes any one or a combination of the following: the identification of the correspondence between the active and standby communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, and the network of the first communication device Identification, the status indication of the first communication device, the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the status indication of the second communication device, and the reason for the status change;
其中,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或备通信设备。Wherein, the second communication device is the main communication device or the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed.
当所述装置2700应用于第一通信设备中时,可选的,各个单元的功能如下:When the apparatus 2700 is applied to a first communication device, optionally, the functions of each unit are as follows:
通信单元2701,用于获取第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,或者由主通信设备变更为备通信设备;The communication unit 2701 is configured to obtain a first state change instruction, and the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the main communication device, or from the main communication device to the standby communication device. communication device;
处理单元2702,用于对所述第一通信设备进行无线接口配置。The processing unit 2702 is configured to perform wireless interface configuration on the first communication device.
可选的,各个单元的功能还可以如下:Optionally, the functions of each unit can also be as follows:
所述处理单元2702通过所述通信单元2701接收请求消息或者通过所述通信单元2701发送查询指示;其中,所述请求信息用于请求:所述第一通信设备成为主通信设备,所述查询指示用于指示所述第一通信设备向网络设备发送配对状态信息。The processing unit 2702 receives a request message through the communication unit 2701 or sends a query instruction through the communication unit 2701; wherein the request information is used to request that the first communication device becomes the master communication device, and the query instruction Used to instruct the first communication device to send pairing status information to the network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述请求信息包含:所述第一通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码和/或第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码;其中,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间存在配对关系。In a possible implementation manner, the request information includes: the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the first communication device and/or the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the second communication device; where There is a pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述配对状态信息包含以下的一项或多项:与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的标识、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的IAB节点识别码、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的C-RNTI、与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的状态指示。其中,所述状态指示用于指示与所述第一通信设备存在配对关系的通信设备的状态为备通信设备或主通信设备。In a possible implementation manner, the pairing status information includes one or more of the following: an identifier of a communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and a pairing relationship with the first communication device The IAB node identification code of the communication device, the C-RNTI of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device, and the status indication of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device. Wherein, the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the communication device that has a pairing relationship with the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,在获取所述第一状态变更指示时,具体用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is specifically configured to: when acquiring the first state change indication:
从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一状态变更指示;或者Receiving the first state change indication from the first communication device; or
从第二通信设备接收所述第一状态变更指示,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备;或者Receiving the first state change indication from a second communication device, the second communication device being the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state change of the first communication device; or
从第三通信设备接收所述第一状态变更指示,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者Receiving the first state change indication from a third communication device, the third communication device being the parent node of the first communication device; or
从核心网设备接收所述第一状态变更指示;或者Receiving the first state change instruction from the core network device; or
从本地获取所述第一状态变更指示。Obtain the first state change indication locally.
在一种可能的实现方式中所述通信单元2701,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,从所述第一通信设备或第三通信设备接收第一状态信息,所述第一状态信息用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change indication, receive first state information from the first communication device or the third communication device, and the first state information A state information is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
所述通信单元2701,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,从第二通信设备或第三通信设备接收第二状态信息,所述第二状态信息用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态为主通信设备;所述处理单元2702,还用于:根据预设的主备通信设备对应关系,确定所述第二通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第一通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, receive second state information from a second communication device or a third communication device, where the second state information is used to notify: 2. The state of the communication device is the master communication device; the processing unit 2702 is further configured to: determine that the backup communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device according to the preset correspondence between the master and backup communication devices , The third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
所述通信单元2701,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,从第二通信设备或第三通信设备接收第二状态信息,所述第二状态信息用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备;所述处理单元2702,还用于:所述网络设备根据预设的主备通信设备对应关系,确定所述第二通信设备对应的主通信设备为所述第一通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, receive second state information from a second communication device or a third communication device, where the second state information is used to notify: 2. The status of the second communication device is the standby communication device; the processing unit 2702 is further configured to: the network device determines that the main communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the A first communication device, the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
所述通信单元2701,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,根据本地保存或者从核心网设备接收的通信设备状态配置信息,向所述第一通信设备或第三通信设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send to the first communication device or the third communication device according to the communication device state configuration information stored locally or received from the core network device A status indication, the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
所述通信单元2701,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,向第三通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,其中,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send communication device state configuration information to a third communication device, wherein the first communication device is in the communication device state configuration information Is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
所述通信单元2701,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,向所述第一通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态 为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者The communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send communication device status configuration information to the first communication device, where the first communication device is in the communication device status configuration information The status is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
所述通信单元2701,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,向所述第一通信设备和/或第三通信设备发送第二状态变更指示;所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备;所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send a second state change instruction to the first communication device and/or the third communication device; the second state change instruction is used for Upon notification: the status of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, or the standby communication device is changed to the main communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
所述通信单元2701,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,从第三通信设备接收第二状态变更指示;所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备;所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。The communication unit 2701 is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, receive a second state change instruction from a third communication device; the second state change instruction is used to notify: the first communication device The status of is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, or from the standby communication device to the main communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信设备,在从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一状态信息时,具体用于:In a possible implementation manner, when the communication device receives the first state information from the first communication device, it is specifically configured to:
从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的标识,其中,所述第一通信设备的标识中包含指示字段,所述指示字段用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者Receiving the identifier of the first communication device from the first communication device, wherein the identifier of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is ready for communication Equipment or main communication equipment; or
从所述第一通信设备接收第二通信设备的指示信息,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为第二通信设备;或者Receiving instruction information of a second communication device from the first communication device, where the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device; or
从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者Receiving a status indication from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device; or
从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的标识和状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第一通信设备的标识用于通知:所述状态指示所指示的状态是第一通信设备的状态;或者Receive from the first communication device the identity and status indication of the first communication device, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the identity of the first communication device is used to notify: The state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device; or
从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;或者Receive a status indication and indication information of a second communication device from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the second communication device The indication information is used to indicate that the main communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device; or
从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;A status indication and indication information of a second communication device are received from the first communication device, the status indication is used to indicate that the state of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the indication information of the second communication device is used Indicating that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device;
其中,所述第二通信设备的指示信息为以下任一项:Wherein, the instruction information of the second communication device is any one of the following:
所述第二通信设备的标识、所述第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的用户标识、所述第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码。The identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, and the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the second communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
在获取所述第一状态变更指示之后,执行以下步骤:After obtaining the first status change indication, perform the following steps:
向第三通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,所述第三通信设备为所述第一通信设备的父节点,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态配置为主通信设备或者备通信设备;或者Sending communication device state configuration information to a third communication device, where the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device, and in the communication device state configuration information, the state of the first communication device is configured as the main communication device Equipment or communication equipment; or
向第三通信设备发送所述第一状态变更指示,所述第三通信设备为所述第一通信设备的父节点。Sending the first state change instruction to a third communication device, where the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元2702,在对所述第一通信设备进行无线接口配置时,具体用于:In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit 2702 is specifically configured to: when performing wireless interface configuration on the first communication device:
通过所述通信单元2701向所述第一通信设备发送通信配置信息;或者Sending communication configuration information to the first communication device through the communication unit 2701; or
通过所述通信单元2701向所述第三通信设备发送第一配置指示,所述第一配置指示用于通知所述第三通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送通信配置信息;或者Sending a first configuration instruction to the third communication device through the communication unit 2701, where the first configuration instruction is used to notify the third communication device to send communication configuration information to the first communication device; or
通过所述通信单元2701向所述第三通信设备发送第二配置指示,所述第二配置指示用于通知所述第三通信设备向所述第一通信设备发送第一通信配置信息集合;或者Sending a second configuration instruction to the third communication device through the communication unit 2701, where the second configuration instruction is used to notify the third communication device to send the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device; or
通过所述通信单元2701向所述第一通信设备发送第一通信配置信息集合;Sending a first set of communication configuration information to the first communication device through the communication unit 2701;
其中,通信配置信息中包含所述第一通信配置信息集合和第二通信配置信息集合。Wherein, the communication configuration information includes the first communication configuration information set and the second communication configuration information set.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
在向所述第一通信设备发送通信配置信息之前,从所述第一通信设备接收通信配置信息请求。Before sending the communication configuration information to the first communication device, receiving a communication configuration information request from the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
在向所述第三通信设备发送所述第一配置指示之前,从所述第一通信设备接收通信配置信息请求。Before sending the first configuration instruction to the third communication device, receive a communication configuration information request from the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
在向所述第三通信设备发送所述第二配置指示之前,从所述第一通信设备接收通信配置请求,其中,所述通信配置信息请求用于请求所述第一通信配置信息集合,所述通信配置信息请求中包含第一指示或第二指示,所述第一指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中已经保存所述第二通信配置信息集合,所述第二指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中未保存所述第一通信配置信息集合。Before sending the second configuration instruction to the third communication device, receive a communication configuration request from the first communication device, where the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set, so The communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, the first indication is used to indicate that the second communication configuration information set has been saved in the first communication device, and the second indication is used to indicate all The first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
在向所述第一通信设备发送所述第一通信配置信息集合之前,从所述第一通信设备接收通信配置请求,其中,所述通信配置信息请求用于请求所述第一通信配置信息集合,所述通信配置信息请求中包含第一指示或第二指示,所述第一指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中已经保存所述第二通信配置信息集合,所述第二指示用于指示所述第一通信设备中未保存所述第一通信配置信息集合。Before sending the first communication configuration information set to the first communication device, receive a communication configuration request from the first communication device, wherein the communication configuration information request is used to request the first communication configuration information set , The communication configuration information request includes a first indication or a second indication, the first indication is used to indicate that the second communication configuration information set has been saved in the first communication device, and the second indication is used to Indicating that the first communication configuration information set is not saved in the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元2701,还用于:In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit 2701 is further configured to:
从所述第一通信设备接收通信配置信息完整指示,所述通信配置信息完整指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备中保存完整的通信配置信息。A complete communication configuration information indication is received from the first communication device, where the complete communication configuration information indication is used to notify that complete communication configuration information is stored in the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信配置信息包含以下任意一项或组合:In a possible implementation manner, the communication configuration information includes any one or a combination of the following:
第二通信设备的无线资源配置信息、第二通信设备进行数据传输时缓存的数据、第四通信设备的网络标识、所述第四通信设备的上下文、所述第四通信设备的服务质量QoS信息、所述第四通信设备的数据无线承载标识DRB ID、所述第四通信设备的无线资源配置信息;Radio resource configuration information of the second communication device, data buffered when the second communication device performs data transmission, the network identification of the fourth communication device, the context of the fourth communication device, and the quality of service QoS information of the fourth communication device , The data radio bearer ID DRB ID of the fourth communication device, and the radio resource configuration information of the fourth communication device;
其中,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备的主通信设备,所述第四通信设备是所述第一通信设备或所述第二通信设备的子节点。Wherein, the second communication device is the master communication device of the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed, and the fourth communication device is the first communication device or the second communication device The child node of the device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一状态变更指示中包含以下任意一项或组合:主备通信设备对应关系标识、所述第一通信设备的标识、所述第一通信设备的网络标识、所述第一通信设备的状态指示、第二通信设备的标识、第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的状态指示、状态变更原因指示;In a possible implementation manner, the first state change indication includes any one or a combination of the following: the identification of the correspondence between the active and standby communication devices, the identification of the first communication device, and the network of the first communication device Identification, the status indication of the first communication device, the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the status indication of the second communication device, and the reason for the status change;
其中,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或备通信设备。Wherein, the second communication device is the main communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device is changed.
需要说明的是,本申请以上实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。It should be noted that the division of modules in the above embodiments of this application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. In addition, each function in each embodiment of this application The unit can be integrated into one processing unit, or it can exist alone physically, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium , Including a number of instructions to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信设备,所述通信设备用于实现以上各图中的通信方法。参阅图28所示,所述通信设备2800包括:收发器2801、处理器2802以及存储器2803。其中,所述收发器2801、所述处理器2802以及所述存储器2803之间相互连接。Based on the above embodiments, the embodiments of the present application also provide a communication device, which is used to implement the communication methods in the above figures. Referring to FIG. 28, the communication device 2800 includes a transceiver 2801, a processor 2802, and a memory 2803. Wherein, the transceiver 2801, the processor 2802, and the memory 2803 are connected to each other.
可选的,所述收发器2801、所述处理器2802以及所述存储器2803之间通过总线2804相互连接。所述总线2804可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图28中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。Optionally, the transceiver 2801, the processor 2802, and the memory 2803 are connected to each other through a bus 2804. The bus 2804 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc. The bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 28, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
所述收发器2801,用于接收和发送数据,实现与其他设备(例如该通信设备的子节点、父节点以及网络设备等)之间的通信。The transceiver 2801 is used to receive and send data, and implement communication with other devices (for example, the child node, parent node, and network device of the communication device).
可选的,所述通信设备2800还包括通信接口2805,用于与部署在同一位置的用于主备状态变更的另一个通信设备建立通信连接。Optionally, the communication device 2800 further includes a communication interface 2805, which is used to establish a communication connection with another communication device deployed in the same location and used for changing the active/standby status.
所述处理器2802,用于实现如以上各图中的通信方法,具体可以参照以上实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The processor 2802 is configured to implement the communication methods in the above figures. For details, reference may be made to the description in the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
所述存储器2803,用于存放程序指令等。具体地,程序指令可以包括程序代码,该程序代码包括计算机操作指令。存储器2803可能包含随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),也可能还包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory),例如至少一个磁盘存储器。处理器2802执行存储器2803所存放的程序指令,实现上述功能,从而实现上述实施例提供的通信方法。The memory 2803 is used to store program instructions and the like. Specifically, the program instructions may include program code, and the program code includes computer operation instructions. The memory 2803 may include random access memory (RAM), and may also include non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk memory. The processor 2802 executes the program instructions stored in the memory 2803 to realize the above-mentioned functions, thereby realizing the communication method provided in the above-mentioned embodiment.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种网络设备,所述网络设备用于实现以上各图中的通信方法。参阅图29所示,所述网络设备2900包括:收发器2901、处理器2902以及存储器2903。其中,所述收发器2901、所述处理器2902以及所述存储器2903之间相互连接。Based on the above embodiments, the embodiments of the present application also provide a network device, which is used to implement the communication methods in the above figures. Referring to FIG. 29, the network device 2900 includes: a transceiver 2901, a processor 2902, and a memory 2903. Wherein, the transceiver 2901, the processor 2902, and the memory 2903 are connected to each other.
可选的,所述收发器2901、所述处理器2902以及所述存储器2903之间通过总线2904相互连接。所述总线2904可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。 所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图29中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。Optionally, the transceiver 2901, the processor 2902, and the memory 2903 are connected to each other through a bus 2904. The bus 2904 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (EISA) bus, etc. The bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus, etc. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used to represent in FIG. 29, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
所述收发器2901,用于接收和发送数据,实现与其他设备之间的通信。The transceiver 2901 is used to receive and send data to realize communication with other devices.
可选的,所述网络设备2900还包括通信接口2905,用于实现与核心网设备之间的通信。Optionally, the network device 2900 further includes a communication interface 2905 for implementing communication with core network devices.
所述处理器2902,用于实现如以上各图中的通信方法,具体可以参照以上实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The processor 2902 is configured to implement the communication methods in the above figures. For details, reference may be made to the description in the above embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
所述存储器2903,用于存放程序指令等。具体地,程序指令可以包括程序代码,该程序代码包括计算机操作指令。存储器2903可能包含随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),也可能还包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory),例如至少一个磁盘存储器。处理器2902执行存储器2903所存放的程序指令,实现上述功能,从而实现上述实施例提供的通信方法。The memory 2903 is used to store program instructions and the like. Specifically, the program instructions may include program code, and the program code includes computer operation instructions. The memory 2903 may include random access memory (RAM), and may also include non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk memory. The processor 2902 executes the program instructions stored in the memory 2903 to realize the aforementioned functions, thereby realizing the communication method provided by the aforementioned embodiment.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行以上实施例提供的通信方法。Based on the above embodiments, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the communication method provided in the above embodiment.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得计算机执行以上实施例提供的通信方法。Based on the above embodiments, the embodiments of the present application further provide a computer storage medium in which a computer program is stored. When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer executes the communication method provided in the above embodiment.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片,所述芯片用于读取存储器中存储的计算机程序,实现以上实施例提供的通信方法。Based on the above embodiments, an embodiment of the present application also provides a chip, which is used to read a computer program stored in a memory to implement the communication method provided in the above embodiment.
基于以上实施例,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,用于支持计算机装置实现以上实施例中通信设备或网络设备所涉及的功能。在一种可能的设计中,所述芯片系统还包括存储器,所述存储器用于保存该计算机装置必要的程序和数据。该芯片系统,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。Based on the above embodiments, the embodiments of the present application provide a chip system including a processor for supporting a computer device to realize the functions related to the communication device or the network device in the above embodiment. In a possible design, the chip system further includes a memory, and the memory is used to store necessary programs and data of the computer device. The chip system can be composed of chips, or include chips and other discrete devices.
综上所述,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法。在该方法中,状态为备通信设备的通信设备可以随时接替对应的主通信设备的传输任务,继续进行业务传输。这样,通信系统通过通信设备的主备通信设备的状态变更,既可以保证业务传输的连续性,又可以避免通信设备长时间运行工作从而延长通信设备的使用寿命,进一步提高约传输的效率,提高了用户的体验。In summary, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. In this method, the communication device in the state of the standby communication device can take over the transmission task of the corresponding main communication device at any time and continue to perform service transmission. In this way, the communication system can ensure the continuity of service transmission by changing the status of the main and standby communication devices of the communication device, and can also prevent the communication device from running for a long time, thereby prolonging the service life of the communication device, and further improving the transmission efficiency. Improve the user experience.
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。Those skilled in the art should understand that the embodiments of the present application can be provided as methods, systems, or computer program products. Therefore, the present application may adopt the form of a complete hardware embodiment, a complete software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware. Moreover, this application may adopt the form of a computer program product implemented on one or more computer-usable storage media (including but not limited to disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) containing computer-usable program codes.
本申请是参照根据本申请实施例的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。This application is described with reference to flowcharts and/or block diagrams of methods, equipment (systems), and computer program products according to the embodiments of this application. It should be understood that each process and/or block in the flowchart and/or block diagram, and the combination of processes and/or blocks in the flowchart and/or block diagram can be implemented by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions can be provided to the processor of a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, an embedded processor, or other programmable data processing equipment to generate a machine, so that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing equipment are generated It is a device that realizes the functions specified in one process or multiple processes in the flowchart and/or one block or multiple blocks in the block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These computer program instructions can also be stored in a computer-readable memory that can guide a computer or other programmable data processing equipment to work in a specific manner, so that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory produce an article of manufacture including the instruction device. The device implements the functions specified in one process or multiple processes in the flowchart and/or one block or multiple blocks in the block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions can also be loaded on a computer or other programmable data processing equipment, so that a series of operation steps are executed on the computer or other programmable equipment to produce computer-implemented processing, so as to execute on the computer or other programmable equipment. The instructions provide steps for implementing functions specified in a flow or multiple flows in the flowchart and/or a block or multiple blocks in the block diagram.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请实施例进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请实施例的范围。这样,倘若本申请实施例的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the embodiments of the present application without departing from the scope of the embodiments of the present application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of the embodiments of this application fall within the scope of the claims of this application and their equivalent technologies, this application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (27)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it comprises:
    第一通信设备向网络设备发送第一状态变更指示,或者获取第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,或者由主通信设备变更为备通信设备;或者The first communication device sends a first state change instruction to the network device, or obtains a first state change instruction, where the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the master communication device , Or change from main communication equipment to backup communication equipment; or
    第一通信设备向网络设备发送请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求:所述第一通信设备成为主通信设备;或者The first communication device sends request information to the network device, where the request information is used to request: the first communication device becomes the master communication device; or
    第一通信设备接收查询指示,所述查询指示用于指示所述第一通信设备向网络设备发送配对状态信息。The first communication device receives a query instruction, where the query instruction is used to instruct the first communication device to send pairing status information to a network device.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一通信设备获取所述第一状态变更指示,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the acquiring, by the first communication device, the first state change indication comprises:
    所述第一通信设备接收所述网络设备或者第三通信设备发送的所述第一状态变更指示,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The first communication device receives the first state change instruction sent by the network device or a third communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述第一通信设备接收第二通信设备发送的所述第一状态变更指示,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或备通信设备。The first communication device receives the first state change instruction sent by a second communication device, and the second communication device is the master communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state change of the first communication device Or prepare communication equipment.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一状态变更指示之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein before the first communication device sends the first state change indication to the network device, the method further comprises:
    所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送状态信息,所述状态信息用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者The first communication device sends status information to the network device or the third communication device, where the status information is used to notify: the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
    所述第一通信设备接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The first communication device receives a status indication sent by the network device or a third communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device, and the third communication device The device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述第一通信设备接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的通信设备状态配置信息,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者Receiving, by the first communication device, communication device status configuration information sent by the network device or a third communication device, where the status of the first communication device in the communication device status configuration information is the standby communication device or the main communication device, The third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述第一通信设备接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的第二状态变更指示,所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。The first communication device receives a second state change instruction sent by the network device or the third communication device, and the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby The communication device, or the standby communication device is changed to the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述状态信息,包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the sending of the status information by the first communication device to the network device comprises:
    所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一通信设备的标识,其中,所述第一通信设备的标识中包含指示字段,所述指示字段用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者The first communication device sends the identity of the first communication device to the network device, where the identity of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate the identity of the first communication device The status is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
    所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送第二通信设备的指示信息,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;或者The first communication device sends instruction information of the second communication device to the network device, where the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the Second communication device; or
    所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者The first communication device sends a status indication to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device; or
    所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送所述第一通信设备的标识和状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第一通信设备的标识用于通知:所述状态指示所指示的状态是第一通信设备的状态;或者The first communication device sends the identification and status indication of the first communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the identification of the first communication device is used In the notification: the state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device; or
    所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备为所述第二通信设备;或者The first communication device sends a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device, and the status of the second communication device is The indication information is used to indicate that the primary communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device; or
    所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;The first communication device sends a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the status of the second communication device is The indication information is used to indicate that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device;
    其中,所述第二通信设备的指示信息为以下任一项:所述第二通信设备的标识、所述第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的用户标识、所述第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码。Wherein, the indication information of the second communication device is any one of the following: the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, the second communication device The access of the communication equipment returns the integrated node identification code.
  5. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述请求信息包含:所述第一通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码和/或第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码;其中,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间存在配对关系。The method according to claim 1, wherein the request information comprises: the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the first communication device and/or the access backhaul integrated node of the second communication device Identification code; wherein there is a pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  6. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that it comprises:
    网络设备获取第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,或者由主通信设备变更为备通信设备;或者The network device obtains a first state change instruction, where the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from a standby communication device to a main communication device, or from a main communication device to a standby communication device; or
    网络设备接收请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求:所述第一通信设备成为主通信设备;或者The network device receives request information, where the request information is used to request: the first communication device becomes the master communication device; or
    网络设备发送查询指示,所述查询指示用于指示所述第一通信设备向所述网络设备发送配对状态信息。The network device sends a query instruction, where the query instruction is used to instruct the first communication device to send pairing status information to the network device.
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备获取所述第一状态变更指示,包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein the obtaining the first state change indication by the network device comprises:
    所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一状态变更指示;或者The network device receives the first state change indication from the first communication device; or
    所述网络设备从第二通信设备接收所述第一状态变更指示,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备;或者The network device receives the first state change instruction from a second communication device, and the second communication device is the primary communication device or standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state change of the first communication device Equipment; or
    所述网络设备从第三通信设备接收所述第一状态变更指示,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The network device receives the first state change indication from a third communication device, the third communication device being the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述网络设备从核心网设备接收所述第一状态变更指示;或者The network device receives the first state change instruction from the core network device; or
    所述网络设备从本地获取所述第一状态变更指示。The network device obtains the first state change indication locally.
  8. 如权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述网络设备接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6 or 7, characterized in that, before the network device receives the first state change indication, the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备或第三通信设备接收第一状态信息,所述第一状态信息用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The network device receives first state information from the first communication device or the third communication device, and the first state information is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, so The third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述网络设备从第二通信设备或第三通信设备接收第二状态信息,所述第二状态信息用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述网络设备根据预设的主备通信设备对应关系,确定所述第二通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第一通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The network device receives second state information from the second communication device or the third communication device, and the second state information is used to notify: the state of the second communication device is the master communication device, and the network device is based on a preset The corresponding relationship between the main and standby communication devices, determining that the standby communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述网络设备从第二通信设备或第三通信设备接收第二状态信息,所述第二状态信息用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备,所述网络设备根据预设的主备通信设备对应关系,确定所述第二通信设备对应的主通信设备为所述第一通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The network device receives second status information from a second communication device or a third communication device, where the second status information is used to notify: the status of the second communication device is a standby communication device, and the network device is preset The main communication device corresponding to the second communication device is determined to be the first communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述网络设备根据本地保存或者从核心网设备接收的通信设备状态配置信息,向所述第一通信设备或第三通信设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The network device sends a status indication to the first communication device or the third communication device according to the communication device status configuration information stored locally or received from the core network device, and the status indication is used to indicate the status of the first communication device The status is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述网络设备向第三通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,其中,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The network device sends communication device status configuration information to a third communication device, where the status of the first communication device in the communication device status configuration information is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device Is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述网络设备向所述第一通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者The network device sends communication device state configuration information to the first communication device, where the state of the first communication device in the communication device state configuration information is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
    所述网络设备向所述第一通信设备和/或第三通信设备发送第二状态变更指示;所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备;所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The network device sends a second state change instruction to the first communication device and/or the third communication device; the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to Standby communication equipment, or change from standby communication equipment to primary communication equipment; the third communication equipment is the parent node of the first communication equipment; or
    所述网络设备从第三通信设备接收第二状态变更指示;所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备;所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。The network device receives a second state change instruction from the third communication device; the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the backup communication device, or the backup communication device Change to the main communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一状态信息,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the receiving, by the network device, the first state information from the first communication device comprises:
    所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的标识,其中,所述第一通信设备的标识中包含指示字段,所述指示字段用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者The network device receives the identification of the first communication device from the first communication device, wherein the identification of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate the identification of the first communication device The status is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
    所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收第二通信设备的指示信息,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为第二通信设备;或者The network device receives the instruction information of the second communication device from the first communication device, where the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second Communication equipment; or
    所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者The network device receives a status indication from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device; or
    所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的标识和状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第一通信设备的标识用于通知:所述状态指示所指示的状态是第一通信设备的状态;或者The network device receives the identification and status indication of the first communication device from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the identification of the first communication device is used In the notification: the state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device; or
    所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;或者The network device receives a status indication and indication information of a second communication device from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device, and the first communication device 2. The instruction information of the communication device is used to indicate that the main communication device or the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device; or
    所述网络设备从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;The network device receives a status indication and indication information of a second communication device from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the status of the second communication device is The indication information is used to indicate that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device;
    其中,所述第二通信设备的指示信息为以下任一项:Wherein, the instruction information of the second communication device is any one of the following:
    所述第二通信设备的标识、所述第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的用户标识、所述第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码。The identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, and the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the second communication device.
  10. 如权利要求6-9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述网络设备获取所述第一状态变更指示之后,所述方法还包括:9. The method according to any one of claims 6-9, wherein after the network device obtains the first state change indication, the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备向第三通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,所述第三通信设备为所述第一通信设备的父节点,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态配置为主通信设备或者备通信设备;或者The network device sends communication device state configuration information to a third communication device, where the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device, and the state of the first communication device in the communication device state configuration information Configured as the main communication device or standby communication device; or
    所述网络设备向第三通信设备发送所述第一状态变更指示,所述第三通信设备为所述第一通信设备的父节点。The network device sends the first state change instruction to a third communication device, and the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
  11. 如权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述请求信息包含:所述第一通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码和/或第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码;其中,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间存在配对关系。The method according to claim 6, wherein the request information comprises: the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the first communication device and/or the access backhaul integrated node of the second communication device Identification code; wherein there is a pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  12. 一种通信装置,所述装置应用于第一通信设备中,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, which is applied to a first communication device, and is characterized in that it comprises:
    通信单元,用于接收和发送数据;Communication unit for receiving and sending data;
    处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元向网络设备发送第一状态变更指示,或者获取第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,或者由主通信设备变更为备通信设备;或者用于通过所述通信单元向网络设备发送请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求:所述第一通信设备成为主通信设备;或者用于通过所述通信单元接收查询指示,所述查询指示用于指示所述第一通信设备向网络设备发送配对状态信息。The processing unit is configured to send a first state change instruction to a network device through the communication unit, or obtain a first state change instruction, where the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is communicated with The device is changed to the main communication device, or the main communication device is changed to the standby communication device; or used to send request information to the network device through the communication unit, and the request information is used to request: the first communication device becomes the main communication device Device; or used to receive a query instruction through the communication unit, where the query instruction is used to instruct the first communication device to send pairing status information to a network device.
  13. 如权利要求12所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元,在获取所述第一状态变更指示时,具体用于:The device according to claim 12, wherein the communication unit is specifically configured to: when acquiring the first state change indication:
    接收所述网络设备或者第三通信设备发送的所述第一状态变更指示,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者Receiving the first state change indication sent by the network device or a third communication device, where the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    接收第二通信设备发送的所述第一状态变更指示,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或备通信设备。Receiving the first state change instruction sent by a second communication device, where the second communication device was a primary communication device or a backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state of the first communication device was changed.
  14. 如权利要求12或13所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元,还用于:The device according to claim 12 or 13, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    在向所述网络设备发送所述第一状态变更指示之前,执行以下步骤:Before sending the first state change instruction to the network device, perform the following steps:
    向所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送状态信息,所述状态信息用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者Sending status information to the network device or the third communication device, where the status information is used to notify: the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
    接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者Receiving a status indication sent by the network device or a third communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the first communication device; The parent node of the communication device; or
    接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的通信设备状态配置信息,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者Receiving the communication device status configuration information sent by the network device or the third communication device, where the status of the first communication device in the communication device status configuration information is the standby communication device or the main communication device, the third communication device Is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    接收所述网络设备或第三通信设备发送的第二状态变更指示,所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。Receive a second state change instruction sent by the network device or the third communication device, where the second state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, or the standby communication device The communication device is changed to the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  15. 如权利要求14所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元,在向所述网络设备发送所述状态信息时,具体用于:The apparatus according to claim 14, wherein the communication unit is specifically configured to: when sending the status information to the network device:
    向所述网络设备发送所述第一通信设备的标识,其中,所述第一通信设备的标识中包含指示字段,所述指示字段用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者Send the identification of the first communication device to the network device, where the identification of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or Main communication equipment; or
    向所述网络设备发送第二通信设备的指示信息,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;或者Sending instruction information of a second communication device to the network device, where the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device; or
    向所述网络设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者Sending a status indication to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
    向所述网络设备发送所述第一通信设备的标识和状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第一通信设备的标识用于通知:所述状态指示所指示的状态是第一通信设备的状态;或者The identification and status indication of the first communication device are sent to the network device, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is a standby communication device or a main communication device, and the identification of the first communication device is used to notify: the status Indicating that the indicated state is the state of the first communication device; or
    向所述网络设备发送状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备为所述第二通信设备;或者Send a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device, and the indication information of the second communication device is used to indicate all The main communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device; or
    向所述网络设备发送状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;Send a status indication and indication information of a second communication device to the network device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the state of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the indication information of the second communication device is used to indicate all The standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device;
    其中,所述第二通信设备的指示信息为以下任一项:所述第二通信设备的标识、所述第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的用户标识、所述第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码。Wherein, the indication information of the second communication device is any one of the following: the identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, the second communication device The access of the communication equipment returns the integrated node identification code.
  16. 如权利要求12所述的装置,其特征在于,所述请求信息包含:所述第一通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码和/或第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码;其中,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间存在配对关系。The apparatus according to claim 12, wherein the request information comprises: the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the first communication device and/or the access backhaul integrated node of the second communication device Identification code; wherein there is a pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  17. 一种通信装置,应用于网络设备,其特征在于,包括:A communication device applied to network equipment, characterized in that it includes:
    通信单元,用于接收和发送数据;Communication unit for receiving and sending data;
    处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元获取第一状态变更指示,所述第一状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由备通信设备变更为主通信设备,或者由主通信设备变更为备通信设备;或者用于通过所述通信单元接收请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求:所述第一通信设备成为主通信设备;或者用于通过所述通信单元发送查询指示,所述查询指示用于指示所述第一通信设备向网络设备发送配对状态信息。The processing unit is configured to obtain a first state change instruction through the communication unit, and the first state change instruction is used to notify: the state of the first communication device is changed from the standby communication device to the main communication device or the main communication device The device is changed to a standby communication device; or it is used to receive request information through the communication unit, and the request information is used to request: the first communication device becomes the main communication device; or it is used to send a query instruction through the communication unit, The query instruction is used to instruct the first communication device to send pairing status information to the network device.
  18. 如权利要求17所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元,在获取所述第一状态变更指示时,具体用于:The device according to claim 17, wherein the communication unit is specifically configured to: when acquiring the first state change indication:
    从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一状态变更指示;或者Receiving the first state change indication from the first communication device; or
    从第二通信设备接收所述第一状态变更指示,所述第二通信设备在所述第一通信设备的状态变更前是所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备;或者Receiving the first state change indication from a second communication device, the second communication device being the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device before the state change of the first communication device; or
    从第三通信设备接收所述第一状态变更指示,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者Receiving the first state change indication from a third communication device, the third communication device being the parent node of the first communication device; or
    从核心网设备接收所述第一状态变更指示;或者Receiving the first state change instruction from the core network device; or
    从本地获取所述第一状态变更指示。Obtain the first state change indication locally.
  19. 如权利要求17或18所述的装置,其特征在于,The device of claim 17 or 18, wherein:
    所述通信单元,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,从所述第一通信设备或第三通信设备接收第一状态信息,所述第一状态信息用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, receive first state information from the first communication device or a third communication device, and the first state information is used to notify: the The status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述通信单元,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,从第二通信设备或第三通信设备接收第二状态信息,所述第二状态信息用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态为主通信设备;所述处理单元,还用于:根据预设的主备通信设备对应关系,确定所述第二通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第一通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, receive second state information from a second communication device or a third communication device, where the second state information is used to notify: the second The state of the communication device is the master communication device; the processing unit is further configured to: determine that the backup communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device according to the preset correspondence between the master and backup communication devices, so The third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述通信单元,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,从第二通信设备或第三通信设备接收第二状态信息,所述第二状态信息用于通知:所述第二通信设备的状态为备通信设备;所述处理单元,还用于:所述网络设备根据预设的主备通信设备对应关系,确定所述第二通信设备对应的主通信设备为所述第一通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, receive second state information from a second communication device or a third communication device, where the second state information is used to notify: the second The state of the communication device is the standby communication device; the processing unit is further configured to: the network device determines that the main communication device corresponding to the second communication device is the first communication device according to the preset correspondence between the main and standby communication devices. Communication device, the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述通信单元,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,根据本地保存或者从核心网设备接收的通信设备状态配置信息,向所述第一通信设备或第三通信设备发送状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send the state to the first communication device or the third communication device according to the communication device state configuration information stored locally or received from the core network device Indicating that the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device;
    所述通信单元,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,向第三通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,其中,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send communication device status configuration information to a third communication device, wherein the status configuration information of the first communication device is The status is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述通信单元,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,向所述第一通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者The communication unit is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send communication device status configuration information to the first communication device, and the status configuration information of the first communication device in the communication device status configuration information The status is the standby communication device or the main communication device; or
    所述通信单元,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,向所述第一通信设备和/或第三通信设备发送第二状态变更指示;所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备;所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点;或者The communication unit is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, send a second state change instruction to the first communication device and/or the third communication device; the second state change instruction is used for Notification: The status of the first communication device is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, or the standby communication device is changed to the main communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device; or
    所述通信单元,还用于:在接收所述第一状态变更指示之前,从第三通信设备接收第二状态变更指示;所述第二状态变更指示用于通知:所述第一通信设备的状态由主通信设备变更为备通信设备,或者由备通信设备变更为主通信设备;所述第三通信设备是所述第一通信设备的父节点。The communication unit is further configured to: before receiving the first state change instruction, receive a second state change instruction from a third communication device; the second state change instruction is used to notify: The state is changed from the main communication device to the standby communication device, or the standby communication device is changed to the main communication device; the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device.
  20. 如权利要求19所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信设备,在从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一状态信息时,具体用于:The apparatus according to claim 19, wherein the communication device is specifically configured to: when receiving the first status information from the first communication device:
    从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的标识,其中,所述第一通信设备的标识中包含指示字段,所述指示字段用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者Receiving the identifier of the first communication device from the first communication device, wherein the identifier of the first communication device includes an indication field, and the indication field is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is ready for communication Equipment or main communication equipment; or
    从所述第一通信设备接收第二通信设备的指示信息,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为第二通信设备;或者Receiving instruction information of a second communication device from the first communication device, where the instruction information of the second communication device is used to indicate that the primary communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device; or
    从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态 为备通信设备或者主通信设备;或者Receiving a status indication from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is a standby communication device or a main communication device; or
    从所述第一通信设备接收所述第一通信设备的标识和状态指示,所述状态指示用于指示状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第一通信设备的标识用于通知:所述状态指示所指示的状态是第一通信设备的状态;或者Receive from the first communication device the identity and status indication of the first communication device, the status indication is used to indicate that the status is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the identity of the first communication device is used to notify: The state indicated by the state indication is the state of the first communication device; or
    从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为备通信设备或者主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的主通信设备或者备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;或者Receive a status indication and indication information of a second communication device from the first communication device, where the status indication is used to indicate that the status of the first communication device is the standby communication device or the main communication device, and the second communication device The indication information is used to indicate that the main communication device or the backup communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device; or
    从所述第一通信设备接收状态指示和第二通信设备的指示信息,所述状态指示用于指示所述第一通信设备的状态为主通信设备,所述第二通信设备的指示信息用于指示所述第一通信设备对应的备通信设备为所述第二通信设备;A status indication and indication information of a second communication device are received from the first communication device, the status indication is used to indicate that the state of the first communication device is the master communication device, and the indication information of the second communication device is used Indicating that the standby communication device corresponding to the first communication device is the second communication device;
    其中,所述第二通信设备的指示信息为以下任一项:Wherein, the instruction information of the second communication device is any one of the following:
    所述第二通信设备的标识、所述第二通信设备的网络标识、所述第二通信设备的用户标识、所述第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码。The identification of the second communication device, the network identification of the second communication device, the user identification of the second communication device, and the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the second communication device.
  21. 如权利要求17-20任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元,还用于:The device according to any one of claims 17-20, wherein the communication unit is further configured to:
    在获取所述第一状态变更指示之后,执行以下步骤:After obtaining the first status change indication, perform the following steps:
    向第三通信设备发送通信设备状态配置信息,所述第三通信设备为所述第一通信设备的父节点,在所述通信设备状态配置信息中所述第一通信设备的状态配置为主通信设备或者备通信设备;或者Sending communication device state configuration information to a third communication device, where the third communication device is the parent node of the first communication device, and in the communication device state configuration information, the state of the first communication device is configured as the main communication device Equipment or communication equipment; or
    向第三通信设备发送所述第一状态变更指示,所述第三通信设备为所述第一通信设备的父节点。Sending the first state change instruction to a third communication device, where the third communication device is a parent node of the first communication device.
  22. 如权利要求17所述的装置,其特征在于,所述请求信息包含:所述第一通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码和/或第二通信设备的接入回传一体化节点识别码;其中,所述第一通信设备和所述第二通信设备之间存在配对关系。The apparatus according to claim 17, wherein the request information comprises: the access backhaul integrated node identification code of the first communication device and/or the access backhaul integrated node of the second communication device Identification code; wherein there is a pairing relationship between the first communication device and the second communication device.
  23. 一种通信设备,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by comprising:
    存储器,用于存储程序指令;Memory, used to store program instructions;
    收发器,用于接收和发送数据;Transceiver, used to receive and send data;
    处理器,用于调用存储在所述存储器中的所述程序指令,通过所述收发器执行如权利要求1-5任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to call the program instructions stored in the memory, and execute the method according to any one of claims 1-5 through the transceiver.
  24. 一种网络设备,其特征在于,包括:A network device, characterized by comprising:
    存储器,用于存储程序指令;Memory, used to store program instructions;
    收发器,用于接收和发送数据;Transceiver, used to receive and send data;
    处理器,用于调用存储在所述存储器中的所述程序指令,通过所述收发器执行如权利要求6-11任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to call the program instructions stored in the memory, and execute the method according to any one of claims 6-11 through the transceiver.
  25. 一种计算机程序,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法。A computer program, characterized in that when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-11.
  26. 一种计算机存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机存储介质中存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被计算机执行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法。A computer storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored in the computer storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-11.
  27. 一种芯片,其特征在于,所述芯片用于读取存储器中存储的计算机程序,执行如权利要求1-11任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized in that the chip is used to read a computer program stored in a memory, and execute the method according to any one of claims 1-11.
PCT/CN2019/081568 2019-04-04 2019-04-04 Communication method and apparatus WO2020199212A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/081568 WO2020199212A1 (en) 2019-04-04 2019-04-04 Communication method and apparatus
PCT/CN2019/097370 WO2020199429A1 (en) 2019-04-04 2019-07-23 Communication method and apparatus
CN201980093245.4A CN113508556B (en) 2019-04-04 2019-07-23 Communication method and device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/081568 WO2020199212A1 (en) 2019-04-04 2019-04-04 Communication method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020199212A1 true WO2020199212A1 (en) 2020-10-08

Family

ID=72664773

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/081568 WO2020199212A1 (en) 2019-04-04 2019-04-04 Communication method and apparatus
PCT/CN2019/097370 WO2020199429A1 (en) 2019-04-04 2019-07-23 Communication method and apparatus

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/097370 WO2020199429A1 (en) 2019-04-04 2019-07-23 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN113508556B (en)
WO (2) WO2020199212A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101150439A (en) * 2007-09-25 2008-03-26 华为技术有限公司 A method, system and device for realizing master/slave switching
CN101854619A (en) * 2009-03-31 2010-10-06 华为技术有限公司 Method for taking over failing local mobile anchor and network equipment
CN102769627A (en) * 2012-07-26 2012-11-07 北京神州绿盟信息安全科技股份有限公司 Configuration file synchronizing method and device

Family Cites Families (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102265555B (en) * 2011-05-31 2015-04-29 华为技术有限公司 Conversion method between an main communicational equipment and a spare communicational equipment, the communicational equipments and a service request equipment
WO2011157149A2 (en) * 2011-05-31 2011-12-22 华为技术有限公司 Method, communication device and system, and service request device for main/standby switch between communication devices
CN103068034B (en) * 2013-01-29 2016-05-11 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 A kind of method that data are synchronous and device
CN104125083A (en) * 2013-04-24 2014-10-29 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Active/standby switchover method, device, equipment and system for network equipment
CN105873010B (en) * 2015-01-19 2021-11-23 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 Method for supporting user equipment to access wireless network, network equipment and user equipment
CN106376059A (en) * 2015-07-30 2017-02-01 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 Call processing method and device
US20170111094A1 (en) * 2015-10-14 2017-04-20 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. Method and apparatus for providing user equipment access to millimeter wave stations through a microwave station
WO2017122298A1 (en) * 2016-01-13 2017-07-20 三菱電機株式会社 Communication system, communication device, and communication destination switching method
CN105848236A (en) * 2016-03-25 2016-08-10 乐视控股(北京)有限公司 Multi-link switching method and apparatus
CN109275177B (en) * 2018-09-17 2020-09-08 武汉虹信通信技术有限责任公司 Method, device and system for accessing IAB base station to network

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101150439A (en) * 2007-09-25 2008-03-26 华为技术有限公司 A method, system and device for realizing master/slave switching
CN101854619A (en) * 2009-03-31 2010-10-06 华为技术有限公司 Method for taking over failing local mobile anchor and network equipment
CN102769627A (en) * 2012-07-26 2012-11-07 北京神州绿盟信息安全科技股份有限公司 Configuration file synchronizing method and device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113508556B (en) 2023-03-10
CN113508556A (en) 2021-10-15
WO2020199429A1 (en) 2020-10-08

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3751886B1 (en) Communication method and device under centralized unit-distributed unit architecture
CN107690162B (en) Method and device for processing cell connection failure
EP3675579B1 (en) Data scheduling methods, apparatus and computer-readable mediums
WO2018045877A1 (en) Network slicing control method and related device
US8874112B2 (en) Service dependent inactivity timer
WO2018202122A1 (en) Network overload control method and device
EP3761681B1 (en) Multi-connection data amount reporting method
WO2021052244A1 (en) Connection mode control method, terminal, and storage medium
CN102598786B (en) Switching method between base stations, base stations and communication system
WO2018019001A1 (en) Terminal state conversion method and apparatus
WO2021238774A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US20120094656A1 (en) Mobile communication method, device, and system for ensuring service continuity
US20220394592A1 (en) Access Control at a Relay User Equipment
CN113098822B (en) Method and device for recovering IMS service
US20220312281A1 (en) Method and device for establishing aggregated connection
WO2023011165A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN111356163A (en) System information notification method, base station equipment and computer storage equipment
US20240147402A1 (en) Managing User Equipment Capabilities in Single and Multiple Registration Scenarios
CN109802982B (en) Dual-connection implementation method, device and system
WO2023241670A1 (en) End-to-end communication establishment method and system
WO2019095379A1 (en) Service activation and deactivation method, device and computer storage medium
WO2020164470A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system
WO2020199212A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
EP2648433B1 (en) Access method and device for user in exception, and communication system
WO2022213371A1 (en) Secondary cell group failure detection and reporting

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19923553

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19923553

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1